JP6653987B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and a plurality of types of identification information are variably displayed when the game medium wins a start winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area. And a slot machine that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, symbols) when a predetermined bet amount is set and a start operation is performed. In the gaming machine configured to be able to execute the variable display of the identification information as described above, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a predetermined display result on the variable display unit, a predetermined game value (for example, a jackpot) State transition) to the player.

  As a technology related to this type of gaming machine, for example, the probability of winning a replay increases and the probability of winning a bonus or a small role is controlled to a replay time set to the same probability as a normal time, and the player There is known a slot machine that displays the number of medals (net number increase) acquired by a player (for example, see Patent Document 1). Further, for example, there is known a slot machine that displays the number of medals to be paid out when a small win is won in a replay time that ends when a fixed number of medals are paid out (for example, see Patent Document 2).

JP 2008-6223 A (eg, paragraph [0070] etc.) JP 2009-5971 A (eg, paragraph [0225], paragraph [0331], etc.)

  By the way, in the gaming machines described in Patent Literature 1 and Patent Literature 2, when the medals are paid out, the number of medals to be paid out or the net increase number is reported to notify that one event of paying out medals has occurred. That's what you do. Then, in the gaming machine that notifies that one event has occurred, when it is also notified that another event different from the one event has occurred, it is possible that different events occur at the same timing. In this case, if the notification method is not considered, there is a possibility that one notification may disturb another notification.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification notifies at the same timing without obstructing another notification. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of performing such operations.

In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine of the present invention
A gaming machine (eg, a slot machine 1 in the second embodiment) capable of playing a game,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (e.g., in the second embodiment, the winning of small prize) first events occur (e.g., in the second embodiment, payout of medals) and, generated with the generation of the first event A second event (for example, in the second embodiment, a net increase in the number of medals reaches a specified number) that is a possible event and is different from the first event;
First notification execution means capable of executing, by the first notification means, first notification capable of specifying that the first event has occurred when the first event has occurred;
The second notification which can specify that the first thing elephants occurs when the first event occurs is executable by the second notification unit, that the second event occurs when the second event occurs A second notification execution unit capable of executing the identifiable third notification by the second notification unit ;
When the first event has occurred and the second event has not occurred, the first notification is performed by the first notification unit, and the second notification is performed by the second notification unit .
When the first event and the second event occur, the first notification is performed by the first notification unit, and the second notification is not performed by the second notification unit, and the third notification is performed.
The first event is that the privilege has been granted, the second event is that the granted privilege has reached a predetermined amount,
The second notification means is a display device .
According to this feature, even in the case of notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without obstructing another notification.

In order to solve the above problems, a gaming machine of the present invention
A gaming machine (eg, a slot machine 1 in the third embodiment) capable of playing a game,
A first event (for example, payout of medals in the third embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the third embodiment, a small prize is won), regardless of whether the first event occurs. different second event (e.g., in the third embodiment, plus the number of aT game) and the first event a events and are possible occurrence,
A first notification that can specify that the first thing elephants occurs when the first event occurs is executable by the first notification unit, that the second event occurs when the second event occurs First notification execution means capable of executing the identifiable second notification by the first notification means ;
An executable by the second informing means a third notification that can specify that the first thing elephants occurs when the first event occurs, the second event occurs when the second event occurs A second notification executing means capable of executing a fourth notification capable of specifying the second notification by the second notifying means ,
When the first event occurs and the second event does not occur, the first notification unit executes the first notification, and the second notification unit executes the third notification.
When the second event has occurred and the first event has not occurred, the second notification is executed by the first notification unit, and the fourth notification is executed by the second notification unit .
When the first event and the second event occur, the first notification unit does not execute the second notification and executes the first notification, but the second notification unit does not execute the third notification and performs the fourth notification. Run
The first event is that a first privilege has been granted, the second event is that a second privilege different from the first privilege has been granted,
The second notification means is a display device .
According to this feature, even in the case of notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without obstructing another notification.

Gaming value storage means (for example, a credit counter which is a credit value in Modification 4) which can be used for setting a bet amount (for example, in Modification 4, a RAM of the main control unit 41 is provided). Predetermined area),
A bet number storage unit (for example, a predetermined area of a RAM of the main control unit 41 in Modification 4) for storing a bet number (for example, a value of a BET counter in Modification 4) set for one game; ,
When the re-game display result is derived, a re-game derivation time setting means for setting the number of bets so that the next game can be started without consuming the game value owned by the player,
Path switching means for switching the flow-down path of the game medium inserted by the player to a discharge-side path discharged to the outside or an intake-side path to take in the inside,
Switching control means for controlling the path switching means,
The gaming machine is
When a game medium is inserted by a player while a game is being played, updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means also changes the game value stored in the game value storage means. Without updating
When a game medium is inserted by the player after the game is completed without deriving the re-game display result, when the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is less than a predetermined upper limit number Updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means, and updating the game value stored in the game value storage means when the upper limit has been reached,
When a game medium is inserted by the player after the re-game display result is derived and the game is completed and before the next game can be started by setting a bet amount by the re-game derivation time setting means, The betting number is set by the re-game derivation setting unit without updating the betting number stored in the betting number storage unit or the game value stored in the gaming value storage unit. If a game medium is inserted by the player after the next game can be started, it is possible to update the game value stored in the game value storage means,
The switching control means,
After the re-game display result is derived and the game is over, and after the betting number is set by the re-game derivation setting means, the game value stored in the game value storage means reaches the upper limit number. First disabling setting processing for determining whether or not the game media can be inserted when the game value stored in the game value storage means has reached the upper limit number. Do
After the bet amount is set, when the insertion of the game medium is detected in a state where the game medium can be inserted, it is determined whether or not the game value stored in the game value storage means reaches the upper limit number. If the determination is made, and the game value stored in the game value storage means reaches the upper limit, a second disable setting process of setting that the insertion of the game medium is impossible is performed,
The common switching process is performed both when the first disabling setting process is performed and when the second disabling setting process is performed, so that the setting that the insertion of the game medium is disabled is performed. In this case, the path switching means is controlled such that the flow-down path of the game medium inserted by the player becomes the discharge-side path .
According to this feature, the next game can be started without using a game value by generating a re-game winning.

The first event is that an advantageous amount (for example, in the second embodiment, the number of paid out medals in the second embodiment) is given to the player,
The second event is that the total amount of the advantageous amount given to the player (for example, a net increase in the second embodiment) becomes a predetermined amount (for example, a prescribed number in the second embodiment). I do.
According to this feature, even when notifying that each of different events relating to the advantageous amount that is advantageous to the player has occurred, one notification can notify at the same timing without disturbing another notification.

When the first event and the second event have occurred, the second notification effect executing means displays the fact that the second event has occurred on a display device (for example, the liquid crystal display 51 in the second embodiment). A second notification effect is performed.
According to this feature, it is possible to further impress that the second event has occurred.

As the second event, an event having a higher priority of notification to the player than the first event is set (for example, in the third embodiment, the number of AT games is additionally displayed),
The first notification effect execution means or the second notification effect execution means executes the first notification effect or the second notification effect by displaying the occurrence of the second event on a display device (for example, in the third embodiment) , The part for displaying the additional number of AT games at St4 and St7 in FIG. 26)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to further impress that the second event has occurred.

Advantageous period control means (for example, in Modification 1, in which the expected value of the gaming value given to the player is higher than the expected value of the game used by the player during an advantageous period (for example, AT in Modification 1). , The part controlled by the AT in the processing of FIG. 19);
When the control of the advantageous period is started, a net increment counting means (for example, in the first modification, which starts counting the net increment obtained by subtracting the gaming value used by the player from the gaming value given to the player) 20), and
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part for performing the processing in FIG. 28 in the first modification) for executing an information effect for notifying that the net number increment counted by the net number increase counting means has reached one specified number. ,
The acquired number counting means terminates the counting of the acquired number when the controllable state is not again in the advantageous period before the predetermined period elapses after the advantageous period ends (see, for example, FIG. Part that ends when 50 games have passed since the end of the AT)
When the acquired number counted by the acquired number counting means reaches one specified number, the gaming machine falls below one specified number, and when the number reaches the specified number again after falling below one specified number, Regulation means for regulating the execution of the notification effect until the counting of the net increment by the net increment counting means is completed (for example, in Modification 1, a portion in which Sh6 processing is not performed when Sh4 in FIG. 28 is Y) is further provided. It is characterized by.
According to this feature, when the state becomes controllable again during the advantageous period before the predetermined period elapses after the advantageous period ends, the notification effect is performed again for the specified number of times that the notification effect has been performed. This prevents the player from being impressed that the gaming value has decreased after the advantageous period has ended.

Acquisition number counting means for counting the number of acquisitions of the game value of the player during the advantageous period (for example, a portion for performing the processing in FIG. 20 in the first modification);
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the first modification, the cherry is won and controlled by the AT, and the remaining five games are played in the AT), a specific effect that can execute a specific effect in a mode different from the notification effect is established. Execution means (for example, a portion for performing the processing in FIG. 29 in the first modification).
When the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect overlap, the notification effect execution unit executes the specific effect without executing the notification effect, and the specific effect execution unit executes the specific effect. When an event in which the gaming value increases later occurs and the number of acquisitions counted by the acquired number counting means has reached one specified number, the notification effect execution means executes the notification effect (for example, Modification Example 1). In FIG. 28, the processing of Sh6 is not performed when Sh5 is Y and the processing of Sh6 is performed when Sh5 is N.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow in which the notification effect is executed when an event in which the gaming value increases increases does not collapse, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. So that the game can proceed.

  In addition, both the number of gaming values assigned to the player and the number of gaming values obtained by subtracting the gaming value used by the player from the gaming value assigned to the player are calculated as the number of acquired gaming values. including.

  In addition, the overlap between the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect includes both a case where the execution is performed in a part of the period and a case where the execution is performed in the entire period. In addition, "when the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect overlap" can be said in other words that the execution timing of the notification effect and the execution timing of the specific effect are at the same time. In this case, the execution start does not necessarily have to be the same, and includes a case where at least a part of the execution period of both effects is the same period.

Acquisition number counting means for counting the number of acquisitions of the gaming value of the player during the advantageous period (for example, a portion for performing the processing in FIG. 20 in the second modification);
When a predetermined condition (for example, the additional condition shown in Sj3 of FIG. 25 in Modification 2) is satisfied, a specific effect execution unit (for example, in FIG. Performing the processing of Sr6 shown in FIG.
When the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect overlap, the specific effect execution unit does not execute the specific effect, and the notification effect execution unit executes the notification effect, and the notification effect execution unit performs the notification effect. When the predetermined condition is satisfied after the execution, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect (for example, in the second modification, when Sr5 in FIG. 31 is Y, the process of Sr6 is not performed, and when Sr5 is N, Is the part that performs Sr6 processing)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the specific effect is changed, the flow that the specific effect is executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied is not collapsed, so that the game is performed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. can do.

  In addition, both the number of gaming values assigned to the player and the number of gaming values obtained by subtracting the gaming value used by the player from the gaming value assigned to the player are calculated as the number of acquired gaming values. including.

  In addition, the overlap between the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect includes both a case where the execution is performed in a part of the period and a case where the execution is performed in the entire period. In addition, "when the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect overlap" can be said in other words that the execution timing of the notification effect and the execution timing of the specific effect are at the same time. In this case, the execution start does not necessarily have to be the same, and includes a case where at least a part of the execution period of both effects is the same period.

Advantageous events obtained by the player (for example, in Modification 3, the number of medals obtained after the start of the AT (medal net increase), the number of medals paid out, and the number of digested games) are reduced to a predetermined number of occurrences (for example, in Modification 3, When the specific game history becomes a predetermined number of 100, 250, 500, 1000,... (For example, in the third modification, the game history becomes a predetermined number of medals acquired after the start of the AT). (For example, in Modification 3, AT continuous winning of the number of additional games, bonus winning of the predetermined number of games, and distribution of the premier effect of the predetermined number of distributions). For example, in the third modification, the processes of steps Sd9, Se3, and Se4 performed by the sub-control unit 91 in FIGS.
A game history notification for notifying that the game has become the specific game history by executing a specific display indicating that the game has become the specific game history (for example, in Modification 3, the number notification effects 502 and 521 in FIG. 38). Means (for example, in the third modification, the processing of steps Sd14 to Sd17, Sf1, and Sf3 executed by the sub control unit 91 in FIGS. 35 and 37);
Privilege amount display (for example, in the second modification, additional notification effects 504, 506, and 510 in FIG. 38) indicating a bonus amount (for example, the number of additional games, the predetermined number of games, and the predetermined number of distributions) as the amount of the provided privilege. , 523) to notify that the privilege has been granted (for example, steps Sd14 to Sd17, Sf6 executed by the sub-control unit 91 in FIGS. 35 and 37 in Modification 3). , Sf7 processing).
A display mode for changing the specific display executed by the game history notification unit to the privilege amount display when the special game history is provided with the bonus, In FIG. 3, the privilege amount display is executed with a partial destruction pattern, an all destruction pattern, a zoom pattern, a shuffle pattern, and a character change pattern in FIG. Continuation of the production pattern is performed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to notify that the privilege has been granted by executing the privilege amount display in a display mode in which the specific display is changed to the privilege amount display when the privilege is given as the specific game history. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively notify that a bonus has been given by becoming a specific game history than a slot machine that does not execute the bonus amount display in the display mode in which the specific display is changed to the bonus amount display.

Game medium detecting means (for example, a inserted medal sensor 31 in the modified example 4) for detecting a inserted game medium (for example, a medal in the modified example 4),
A game value (for example, a credit counter which is a credit value in Modification 4) that can be used for setting a bet amount in accordance with a betting operation (for example, an operation on the MAXBET switch 6 in Modification 4) is stored. Gaming value storage means (for example, in a fourth modification, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41);
A bet number storage unit (for example, a predetermined area of a RAM of the main control unit 41 in Modification 4) for storing a bet number (for example, a value of a BET counter in Modification 4) set for one game; ,
In accordance with the result of detection by the game medium detecting means (for example, in Modification 4, YES in S30 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the bet amount stored in the bet number storing means and the gaming value storing means are stored in the betting number storing means. A game medium detection updating means for updating any of the stored game values (for example, S33 to S35 and S40 in FIGS. 39 to 41 in Modification 4);
By deriving a replay display result (for example, replay, first and second replays in Modification 4) (for example, in Modification 4, YES in S12 of FIGS. 39 to 41), the game A re-game derivation update unit that updates the bet number stored in the bet number storage unit so that the next game can be started without using a value (for example, in Modification 4, FIG. 39 to FIG. 41). S14, S15),
After the re-game display result is derived, delay control means for performing delay control for delaying the timing at which the next game can be started until the release condition is satisfied (for example, in Modification 4, FIGS. 39 to 41). S13), and
The release condition is satisfied when the result of the detection by the game medium detecting means becomes the result for release (detected by the specific sensor) (for example, in Modification 4, S91 in FIG. 42),
The game medium detection time updating means,
The game medium is detected by the game medium detection means after the game is over without the re-game display result being derived, so that the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is a predetermined upper limit number. (3) Updating the bet number stored in the bet amount storage means when the value is less than the value, and updating the game value stored in the game value storage means when the upper limit number is reached. Updating means for detecting a game medium (for example, in Modification 4, S33 to S35 in FIGS. 39 to 41);
After the re-game display result is derived, the betting number stored in the betting number storage means is updated by the re-game derivation updating means and the game medium detecting means is started after the next game can be started. The second game medium detection time updating means (for example, S40 in FIG. 40 in Modification 4; FIG. 39, FIG. 39) for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means by detecting the game medium by In addition to the processing of S10 to S12, after the bet amount setting is completed and after it is determined in S19 that credit is possible, the processing is executed in S21 and thereafter (see FIG. 43 (c)). Including.
According to this feature, even after the re-game display result is derived, the inserted gaming medium is updated by the re-game derivation time update means, the bet amount is updated, and the next game can be started. By detecting the game medium, the game value can be updated according to the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated before the bet amount is set after the re-game display result is derived. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the re-game display result is derived without causing a sense of incongruity. Further, delay control is performed after the re-game display result is derived, and the delay control is released when a game medium is inserted and the detection result by the game medium detection unit becomes a release result. Thereby, even when the bet amount is updated by deriving the re-game display result to the player, the next game cannot be started unless the game medium is inserted, and the game medium is inserted. This makes it seem as if the next game can be started.

  The upper limit number may be a predetermined number, and may be a single number, or may be a number determined according to the game state being controlled. Further, the upper limit number may be the same as a predetermined number at which the game can be started, or may be a number larger than the predetermined number.

  For the game media in which the game value can be updated after the re-game display result is derived, the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is updated by the re-game derivation update means, and the next game is played. Any game medium that has been detected after the start of the game can be used. For example, it is assumed that the betting number stored in the betting number storage means is updated by the re-game derivation updating means and the next game can be started. The game medium may be a game medium detected after a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined period, completion of a predetermined process, or the like) is satisfied after the game has been performed (see “Allowable timing of insertion / payment after replay winning” in Modification Example 4). ] Column (b)).

  The detection result (hereinafter, also referred to as an update result) of the game medium detecting means for updating one of the bet amount and the game value by the game medium detecting update means and the release result for satisfying the release condition are inserted. The detection result of the same detection means may be the detection result of the detection means for detecting the performed game medium, and the release result is the same as the detection means for determining whether the update result is obtained. The detection results of some of the detection means (specific sensors) of the plurality of detection means (plural sensors) for determining whether or not the detection results of the detection means and the update results are the update results. The detection result may be a detection result of a detection unit (a special sensor that does not contribute to the update result) different from the detection unit for determining whether or not the determination is made.

Game medium detecting means (for example, a inserted medal sensor 31 in the modified example 4) for detecting a inserted game medium (for example, a medal in the modified example 4),
A gaming value (for example, a credit value in Modification 4) that can be used to set the number of bets in response to a betting operation (for example, the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 in Modification 4). Gaming value storage means (for example, a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 in Modification 4) for storing a credit counter);
A bet number storage unit (for example, a predetermined area of a RAM of the main control unit 41 in Modification 4) for storing a bet number (for example, a value of a BET counter in Modification 4) set for one game; ,
In accordance with the result of detection by the game medium detecting means (for example, in Modification 4, YES in S30 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the bet amount stored in the bet number storing means and the gaming value storing means are stored in the betting number storing means. A game medium detection updating means for updating any of the stored game values (for example, S33 to S35 and S40 in FIGS. 39 to 41 in Modification 4);
When the replay display result (for example, replay, first and second replays) is derived (for example, in Modification 4, YES in S12 in FIGS. 39 to 41), the game value is not used. Re-game derivation updating means (for example, S14 and S15 in FIGS. 39 to 41 in Modification 4) for updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means so that the next game can be started; ,
After the re-game display result is derived, delay control means for performing delay control for delaying the timing at which the next game can be started until the release condition is satisfied (for example, in Modification 4, FIGS. 39 to 41). S13), and
The release condition is satisfied when the result of the detection by the game medium detecting means becomes the result for release (detected by the specific sensor) (for example, in Modification 4, S91 in FIG. 42),
The game medium detection time updating means,
The game medium is detected by the game medium detection means after the game is over without the re-game display result being derived, so that the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is a predetermined upper limit number. (3) Updating the bet number stored in the bet amount storage means when the value is less than the value, and updating the game value stored in the game value storage means when the upper limit number is reached. Updating means for detecting a game medium (for example, in Modification 4, S33 to S35 in FIGS. 39 to 41);
After the re-game display result is derived, the update of the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is started by the re-game derivation update means, and then the game medium is detected by the game medium detection means. In this way, the second game medium detection updating means for updating the game value stored in the game value storage means (for example, refer to FIG. 44 in Modification Example 4, [Allowance of Insertion and Settlement after Replay Winning] About timing] column))).
According to this feature, even after the re-game display result is derived, the inserted game medium is the game medium detected after the update of the bet amount by the re-game derivation update unit is started. Thereby, the game value can be updated according to the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated before the bet amount is set after the re-game display result is derived. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the re-game display result is derived without causing a sense of incongruity. Further, delay control is performed after the re-game display result is derived, and the delay control is released when a game medium is inserted and the detection result by the game medium detection unit becomes a release result. Thereby, even when the bet amount is updated by deriving the re-game display result to the player, the next game cannot be started unless the game medium is inserted, and the game medium is inserted. This makes it seem as if the next game can be started.

  The upper limit number may be a predetermined number, and may be a single number, or may be a number determined according to the game state being controlled. Further, the upper limit number may be the same as a predetermined number at which the game can be started, or may be a number larger than the predetermined number.

  Game media for which the game value can be updated after the re-game display result is derived are updated after the re-game derivation-time updating means starts updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means. Any detected game medium may be used. For example, after the update of the betting number stored in the betting number storage unit is started by the re-game derivation updating unit, a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined period, end of predetermined processing) (For example, refer to FIG. 44 in Modification Example 4 and refer to the [Regarding Acceptable Timing of Insertion and Settlement after Replay Winning] section in Modification Example 4).

  The detection result (hereinafter, also referred to as an update result) of the game medium detecting means for updating one of the bet amount and the game value by the game medium detecting update means and the release result for satisfying the release condition are inserted. The detection result of the same detection means may be the detection result of the detection means for detecting the performed game medium, and the release result is the same as the detection means for determining whether the update result is obtained. The detection results of some of the detection means (specific sensors) of the plurality of detection means (plural sensors) for determining whether or not the detection results of the detection means and the update results are the update results. The detection result may be a detection result of a detection unit (a special sensor that does not contribute to the update result) different from the detection unit for determining whether or not the determination is made.

  It should be noted that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied. FIG. 3 is an internal structure diagram of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating control contents of a start process (main) executed by the main control unit at the time of start. 9 is a flowchart illustrating control contents of a start process (main) executed by the main control unit at the time of start. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the game process which a main control part performs after a setting change process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating the control content of a timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit at regular intervals. 9 is a flowchart illustrating the control content of a timer interrupt process (main) executed by the main control unit at regular intervals. It is a figure for explaining the kind of special combination (bonus), the symbol combination of special combination, and the technical matter related to special combination. It is a figure for explaining the kind of a small combination, the symbol combination of a small combination, and the technical matter related to a small combination. It is a figure for explaining the kind of replay, the symbol combination of replay, and the technical matter related to replay. It is a figure for explaining the symbol combination of a transition appearance, and a technical matter related to a transition appearance. It is a figure for explaining transition of a game state and RT. It is a figure for explaining a navigation target combination in AT. It is a figure for explaining reel control at the time of winning a plurality of re-games. It is a figure for explaining reel control at the time of a plurality of small winning combinations. 9 is a flowchart illustrating control contents of a start-up process (sub) executed by a sub-control unit at the time of start-up. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the timer interruption process (sub) which a sub control part performs at regular intervals. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the net number counting process which a sub control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub). It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the notification effect execution process which a sub-control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub) in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the notification effect execution process which a sub-control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub) in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the AT game number addition lottery process which a sub-control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the notification effect execution process which a sub-control part performs in a timer interruption process (sub) in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of 3rd Embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating control contents of a notification effect execution process executed by a sub control unit in a timer interrupt process (sub) in Modification Example 1. 15 is a flowchart illustrating the control content of a continuous effect execution process executed by a sub control unit in a timer interrupt process (sub) in Modification Example 1. 15 is a flowchart illustrating control contents of a notification effect execution process executed by a sub control unit in a timer interrupt process (sub) in a second modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating the control content of an additional effect execution process executed by the sub control unit in the timer interrupt process (sub) in Modification Example 2. It is an explanatory view showing the relation between the presence or absence of the notification effect and the transition of the net number of medals in the first modification. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example at the time of restricting a notification effect in the modification 1. It is a flow chart which shows the example in the case of restricting a specific effect in modification 2. 15 is a flowchart illustrating control contents of a timer interrupt process (sub) executed by a sub control unit in a third modification. 18 is a flowchart illustrating control details of an AT continuation lottery process executed by a sub control unit in Modification Example 3. 15 is a flowchart illustrating control contents of an effect pattern selection process executed by a sub-control unit in Modification 3. In the third modification, (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a number notification effect, (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous winning notification effect of a partial destruction pattern, and (C) is (B) is a continuous election of a destruction pattern. FIG. 4D is a diagram illustrating an example of a notification effect, and FIG. 4D is a diagram illustrating an example of a continuous winning notification effect after completion of all effects. 15 is a flowchart illustrating the control content of a BET process executed by a main control unit in Modification Example 4. 15 is a flowchart illustrating the control content of a BET process executed by a main control unit in Modification Example 4. 15 is a flowchart illustrating the control content of a BET process executed by a main control unit in Modification Example 4. 13 is a flowchart illustrating control contents of a re-freeze process executed by a main control unit in Modification Example 4. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after a game is completed in Modification Example 4. FIG. 18 is a diagram for describing a timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after a game is completed in Modification Example 4. 15 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a modification 5. FIG. 15 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of a main board included in a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification Example 5. FIG.

[About the first embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described.

[Example of slot machine configuration]
As shown in FIG. 1, a slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 2, inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel, center reel, right Reels) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R pass through the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged so that it can be seen.

  As shown in FIG. 3, "black 7", "net 7 (hatched in the figure)", "white 7", "BAR", "replay", A plurality of mutually identifiable patterns such as "plum", "watermelon", "cherry", "bell", and "orange" are drawn in a predetermined order, each of which is 21 pieces. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed in upper, lower, middle and lower tiers in the see-through window 3 provided substantially at the center of the reel panel 1c of the front door 1b.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other, and are rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4). In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three continuous symbols are derived and displayed on the see-through window 3 as a display result.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, a reel sensor 33L, 33C, 33R for detecting a reference position and a reel LED 55 for irradiating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R from the back are provided for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively. , Are provided. The reel LED 55 includes twelve LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  At a position corresponding to each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the front door 1b, there is provided a horizontally long rectangular see-through window 3 that allows the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to be seen from the front side. The reels 2L, 2C, 2R can be visually recognized from the player side via the player.

  In the front door 1b, a medal insertion portion 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout port 9 for paying out medals, and a credit (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) are used. The MAXBET switch 6, which is operated when setting the maximum bet number (3 in any of the game states in the present embodiment) among the predetermined number of bets determined according to the game state, stored as credits Settlement switch 10 operated to settle the medals used for setting the number of medals and the number of bets (return the medals used for setting the number of credits and the number of bets), start operated to start the game A switch 7, a stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R operated when stopping the rotation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, a production switch for use in production; 56 are respectively provided so as to be operated by the player.

  In the present embodiment, of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started rotating, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, the stop is the first stop, and the stop operation is the first stop reel. It is referred to as one stop operation (or first stop). Similarly, the reel that stops second is referred to as a second stop reel, the stop is referred to as a second stop, and the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation (or a second stop). The reel that stops third is referred to as a third stop reel, the stop is referred to as a third stop or a final stop, and the stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation (or a third stop).

  Also, on the front door 1b, a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out upon occurrence of a prize, an error code indicating the content of an error when an error occurs, and the like are displayed. A game assist display 12, a 1 BET LED 14 for notifying by light that a bet number is set to 1, a 2 BET LED 15 for notifying by light that a bet number is set to 2, and a light to indicate that a bet number is set to 3 The 3BET LED 16 for notifying, the insertion request LED 17 for notifying by light the state in which medals can be inserted, the start valid LED 18 for notifying by light that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, the weight (start of the previous game) Waiting for reel rotation to start because a certain period has not elapsed since Weight in LED19 for notifying by lighting a a is that during the game display section 13 in the replay LED20 is provided for informing is provided by lighting the effect that during replay game, which will be described later.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the bet amount by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided to notify by light that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid. Have been.

  Below the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R on the front door 1b, a lower panel 1d on which a title of the slot machine 1, a payout table 1 described later, and the like are printed is provided.

  Inside the front door 1b, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a hitting state described later by a predetermined key operation, and during a change of a set value described later and a check of the set value A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and enabling / disabling a stop function for controlling a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at the end of BB described later. Switch 36a for selecting the automatic settlement function (automatic settlement function for controlling the settlement (return) of medals stored as credits regardless of the operation of the player) at the end of BB described later. The automatic settlement switch 36b for selecting invalidity and the flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 are connected to a hopper tank 34a described later provided inside the housing 1a (see FIG. 2). ) Side or the medal payout opening 9 side, and has a flow path switching solenoid 30 and an inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting medals which are inserted from the medal input section 4 and flow down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector (not shown) and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting the open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, inside the housing 1a, the reel sensors 33L capable of detecting the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and stored in the hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out tokens from the medal payout exit 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a is provided. Inside the overflow tank 35, there is provided a full tank sensor 35a, which is provided at a height at which a predetermined amount of stored medals can be detected and is made of a pair of left and right conductive members separated from each other. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored inside becomes greater than or equal to a predetermined amount when conductive by contacting via the medal stored inside, that is, that the overflow tank is full. Has become.

  On the front of the power supply box 100, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stop state in a normal state, and in a setting change state, A reset / setting switch 38 functioning as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (a payout rate) of an internal lottery described later, and a power switch 39 operated when turning on / off the power are provided. .

  When playing a game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet amount is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets set according to the game state is set, the pay line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. Become. In the present embodiment, the pay line LN is activated when the specified number of bets is set to three regardless of the game state and the specified number of bets is set. If medals are inserted in more than the maximum number among the prescribed numbers corresponding to the gaming state, the medals are added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether the combination of the symbols displayed in the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a combination of the winning symbols. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the pay line LN set across the middle row of the reels 2L, the middle row of the reels 2C, and the middle row of the reels 2R, that is, the symbols horizontally arranged in the middle row, is the pay line. It is defined as. In the present embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to make it easy to recognize that the combination of the symbols constituting the prize on the prize line LN, invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are set separately from the prize line LN. The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not determined based on the combination of the symbols arranged on the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. When the combination of the symbols constituting the specific prize is arranged on the prize line LN, the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are invalid. When a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) that wins when the winning line LN is aligned with any of the LM1 to LM4 is arranged, a symbol forming a specific winning on the winning line LN is formed. This is to make it easy to recognize that the combination is complete. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper line of the reel 2L, the upper line of the reel 2C, and the upper line of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM1 and the reel 2L The lower line, the lower line of the reel 2C, the lower line of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols horizontally arranged in the lower line, the upper line of the reel 2L, the middle line of the reel 2C, the lower line of the reel 2R, that is, the lower right There are four types of invalid lines: an invalid line LM3 set across the arranged symbols, a lower portion of the reel 2L, a middle portion of the reel 2C, and an upper portion of the reel 2R, that is, an invalid line LM4 set across the symbols lined up to the right. It is defined as LM.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R rotate, and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R change continuously. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the see-through window 3.

  When one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter, also referred to as a combination) on the winning line LN is displayed on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. When the game stops, a prize is generated, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player according to the prize, and are added to the credit. When the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in the present embodiment), medals are paid directly from the medal payout port 9 (see FIG. 1). When the combination of symbols accompanied by the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a result of displaying the reels 2L, 2C, 2R on the payline LN, the game state is shifted to the gaming state according to the combination of the symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and ends when all the reels stop. One unit of control (game control) for executing the game is started when all controls accompanying the end of the previous game are completed, and when all controls accompanying the end of the game are completed. finish.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotated to start changing the symbol, any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated. When operated, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbol is stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (millisecond).

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and change 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1,680 symbols, so that a maximum of four symbols are drawn during 190 ms. You can do it. That is, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols four frames away from the symbols, for a total of five symbols.

  Therefore, for example, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is set as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead is displayed. Since the symbol can be displayed in the lower row, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated on each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is operated. Can be displayed on the winning line LN.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. Is produced, and a drive power supply for the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 101 and supplied to each unit.

  A power supply of AC 100 V is supplied to the power supply board 101 from the outside, and a DC voltage required for driving the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the power supply of AC 100 V, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 Is supplied to the effect control board 90 connected via the. In addition, a command transmission line from the main control unit 41 to the sub-control unit 91, which will be described later, and a power supply line for supplying power from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 are connected via a system of cables and connectors. By connecting all the connectors that connect these cables to each board, each part on the effect control board 90 side becomes operable, and a state in which a command from the main control unit 41 can be received. Become. Therefore, unless a command transmission line for transmitting a command from the main control unit 41 is connected to the effect control board 90, power is not supplied to the effect control board 90, and only the effect control board 90 operates. I won't.

  The hopper motor 34b, the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the inserted medal sensor 31, and the door opening are provided. The detection switch 25, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. The detection signals of these connected switches are input.

  In addition, the game control board 40 includes the above-mentioned credit indicator 11, game assist indicator 12, payout indicators 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, insertion request LED 17, start valid LED 18, wait LED 19, replay LED 20, BET The switch valid LED 21, the left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected, and The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on the control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a main control unit 41, a random number generation circuit 42, a sampling circuit 43, a switch detection circuit 44, a motor drive circuit 45, a solenoid drive circuit 46, an LED drive circuit 47, a power cutoff detection circuit 48, and a reset circuit 49. Is installed.

  The main control unit 41 is configured by a one-chip microcomputer and includes a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 executes a control program stored in the ROM 41b to perform processing relating to the progress of the game, and directly or indirectly controls each unit of a control circuit mounted on the game control board 40.

  The random number generation circuit 42 is configured by a counter that counts up and updates the value each time a predetermined number of pulses are generated, and the sampling circuit 43 acquires the numerical value counted by the random number generation circuit 42. In the random number generation circuit 42, a range of numerical values to be counted for each type of random number is defined. In the present embodiment, 0 to 65535 is defined as the range. The main CPU 41a sends an instruction to the sampling circuit 43 in accordance with the processing, thereby acquiring the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit 42 as a random number value (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a hardware random number function). The random number for internal lottery described later is not used as it is by the hardware random number function, but is processed by software and used. The main CPU 41a also has a function of updating the value of a specific register by the above-described timer interrupt processing (main) and obtaining the updated numerical value as a random number (hereinafter, this function is referred to as a software random number function). .

  The switch detection circuit 44 receives a detection signal input from switches connected directly to the game control board 40 or via the power supply board 101 and transmits the signal to the main control section 41. The motor drive circuit 45 transmits the motor drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30. The LED drive circuit transmits the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. The power interruption detection circuit 48 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1, and when detecting a voltage drop, outputs a voltage drop signal indicating this to the main control unit 41. The reset circuit 49 supplies a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the power supply is unstable such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off.

  The CPU 41 a of the main control unit 41 executes processing for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 by executing the program read from the ROM.

  As described above, in the main control unit 41, the CPU 41a executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 41b. Therefore, hereinafter, execution (or processing) of the main control unit 41 (or CPU 41a) means More specifically, the CPU 41a executes control according to a program. The same applies to the microcomputer mounted on a board other than the game control board 40.

  The RAM 41c provided in the main control unit 41 provides a work area for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 41c is stored for a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, all areas of the RAM 41c are used as backup RAMs, and even if power supply to the slot machine is stopped, all contents of the RAM 41c are stored for a predetermined period.

  The ROM 41a provided in the main control unit 41 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 41b stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 41a to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 41b stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 41a to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the game control board 40.

  In the RAM 41c provided in the main control section 41, a game control data holding area is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the slot machine 1, and the like. For example, a DRAM is used as the RAM 41c, and a refresh operation for maintaining stored data contents is required. The CPU 41a has a built-in refresh register for performing this refresh operation. For example, the refresh register is composed of 8 bits, of which the lower 7 bits are automatically incremented each time the CPU 41a fetches an instruction from the ROM 41b. Therefore, the update of the stored value in the refresh register is performed every execution time of one instruction in the CPU 41a.

  The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is transmitted in only one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41.

  The main control section 41 receives detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from an input port. Then, the main control unit 41 executes a basic process of shifting stepwise according to the detection states of various switches input from these input ports.

  Further, the main control unit 41 can execute the interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process (main), which will be described later, is executed at fixed time intervals (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time during which the processing that repeats according to the control state in the basic processing completes and the execution time of the timer interrupt processing (main). Thus, at least one cycle of the process repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is performed at least.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of the interrupt processing, and when a plurality of interrupts occur simultaneously, the main control unit 41 gives priority to a predetermined order. Interrupts to execute are set. If another interrupt factor occurs during the execution of the interrupt process and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt process is completed, a new interrupt occurs at that time. It will be.

  The effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input.

  The rendering control board 90 is connected to rendering devices such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the aforementioned reel LED 55 arranged on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These effect devices are driven based on control by a later-described sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55. However, an output control unit that directly performs output control of the effect device separately from the sub-control unit 91 is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output pattern of the effect device may be determined based on the output pattern determined by the sub-control unit 91, and the output control unit may control the output of the effect device based on the output pattern determined by the sub-control unit 91. The output control of the effect device is performed by both of the control units.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are illustrated as the effect devices. However, the effect devices are not limited thereto, and may be, for example, mechanically driven. A display device, a mechanically driven role object, or the like may be applied as the rendering device.

  The effect control board 90 includes a microcomputer including a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d, like the main control unit 41, and controls the effect. A display control circuit 92 for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the display device; an effect effect LED 52; an LED drive circuit 93 for controlling the drive of the reel LED 55; an audio output circuit 94 for controlling the audio output from the speakers 53 and 54; A reset circuit 95 that supplies a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a certain period of time, and detects a detection signal input from the effect switch 56 connected to the effect control board 90. Switch detection circuit 96 outputs time information including date information and time information Clock device 97, a power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power cutoff detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating this to the sub CPU 91 a, and other circuits The sub CPU 91a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40, performs various controls for performing the effect, and controls each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90. Control directly or indirectly.

  In the reset circuit 95, the voltage at which the reset signal is released is set lower than that of the reset circuit 49 that supplies a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. It is designed to be started earlier than the section 41. On the other hand, in the power interruption detection circuit 98, the voltage at which the voltage drop signal is output is set to be lower than that of the power interruption detection circuit 48 which outputs the voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. In, the sub-control unit 91 detects a power failure at a later stage than the main control unit 41, and performs a power interruption process (sub) described later.

  The sub-control unit 91 has an interrupt function similarly to the main control unit 41, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires the command transmitted from the main control unit 41. , Execute the command reception interrupt processing stored in the buffer. Further, the sub control unit 91 generates an interrupt every time the number of input system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, at certain intervals, and executes a timer interrupt process (sub) described later.

  Further, unlike the main control unit 41, when an interrupt occurs based on the reception of a command, the sub-control unit 91 interrupts the timer interrupt process (sub) even during execution of the process. , A command reception interrupt process is executed, and even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur simultaneously, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority.

  The backup power is also supplied to the sub-control unit 91 at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained while the backup power is supplied. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 91c is stored for a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, all areas of the RAM 91c are used as backup RAMs, and all the contents of the RAM 91c are stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the slot machine is stopped. In the present embodiment, all areas of the RAM 91c are used as backup RAMs, and all the contents of the RAM 91c are stored for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the slot machine is stopped.

[Settings]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout rate of medals changes according to the set value. More specifically, the payout rate of medals is changed by using a winning probability according to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to the setting change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operated from the setting 6, the display returns to the setting 1). . Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (set value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state where the game can proceed.

  In order to confirm the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on while the bet amount is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the progress of the game is not possible, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state ends, and the game returns to a state in which the game can proceed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected each time the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed. A power outage determination process is performed, and when it is determined in the power outage determination process that a voltage drop signal is detected, a power interruption process (main) is executed. In the power interruption processing (main), the destructive diagnosis data (5AH in this embodiment) in which any bit becomes 1 (ie, specific data other than 0) is stored in the RAM 41c, and is stored in all the areas of the RAM 41c. Processing for calculating RAM parity adjustment data so that the RAM parity based on the stored data becomes 0 and storing the data in the RAM 41c is performed. Note that the RAM parity is a value calculated as an exclusive OR of values stored in each bit of a corresponding area (all areas in the present embodiment) of the RAM 41c. Therefore, if the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 41c is 0, the RAM parity adjustment data is 0, and the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 41c is 1. For example, the data for RAM parity adjustment is 1.

  Then, the main control unit 41 calculates the RAM parity based on the data stored in all the areas of the RAM 41c at the time of the start, regardless of whether the system reset or the user reset is performed, and calculates the value of the destructive diagnosis data. And the processing state of the main control unit 41 is returned to the state before the power failure based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, provided that the RAM parity is 0 and the value of the destruction diagnosis data is also correct. However, if the RAM parity is not 0 (1) or the value of the destructive diagnosis data is incorrect, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register to control the RAM abnormal error state. Then, the progress of the game is disabled. Note that, unlike the normal error state, the RAM abnormal error state is not released even when the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and a new set value is set in the above-described setting change state. Will not be released until the

  In the present embodiment, all data stored in the RAM 41c is retained by the backup power supply even during a power failure, and the main control unit 41 determines that the data in the RAM 41c is normal when the power is turned on. In this case, the control state before the power failure is restored based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, but only the data stored in the RAM 41c that is necessary to return to the control state in the event of a power failure is backed up, It may be configured to return to the control state before the power failure based on the data backed up at the time of turning on.

  In addition, when returning to the control state before the power failure when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to return all the control states to the control state before the power failure, and the minimum control state that does not disadvantage the player It is not necessary to restore all the states of the input ports to the state before the power failure, for example.

[About initialization]
Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, an unsaved work, a general work, a special work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work includes data that is inconvenient to be initialized, such as various display devices, LED display data, I / O input / output data, and a game time counter, and an RT flag and the number of remaining RT games described later. Work. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set at the time of startup regardless of whether the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of paid out medals, the total number of paid out medals in BB, and a game state flag described later. The special work is a work in which data, such as various software random numbers, that is initialized only before the setting is started is stored. The unused area is an unused area of the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main control unit 41 is stored. The unused stack area is, like the unused area, one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later. However, if the condition is satisfied, the initialization is performed, but the used stack area is not initialized for the continuation of the program.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 starts the data processing when the setting key switch 37 is turned on, when a RAM error occurs, when BB ends, and when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the data stored in the RAM 41c. Is not destroyed, when the five initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied, four types of initialization with different areas initialized according to each initialization condition are performed.

  Initialization 1 is a state in which the setting key switch 37 is turned on at the time of start-up, and is an initialization performed prior to the transition to the setting change state or an initialization performed when a RAM abnormality error occurs. In the storage area of the RAM 41c, all the areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) except the important work and the used stack area, that is, the area from the non-preserved work to the unused stack area are initialized. You. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of BB. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area of the storage area of the RAM 41c, that is, the area from the general work to the unused stack area are stored. Initialized. Initialization 3 is initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is off at the time of startup and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. In initialization 3, the unsaved work, the unused area, and the unused The used stack area is initialized. The initialization 4 is an initialization performed at the end of one game. In the initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area of the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, the initialization 1 is performed before the transition of the setting change state. However, the initialization 1 is performed at the end of the setting change state, or both before the transition to the setting change state and at the end of the setting change state. May be.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a RAM abnormality error occurs at power-on or the like, the initialization 1 is executed, and the control state before that is initialized. The RT flag and the number of remaining RT games assigned to the work are retained without being initialized. On the other hand, the gaming state flag assigned to the general work is initialized with the execution of the initialization 1.

[Internal lottery]
In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the specified number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state (usually, inside, BB (RB)) is determined, and is determined according to the gaming state. The game can be started on the condition that the specified prescribed number of bets has been set. In the present embodiment, the pay line LN is activated when a specified number of bets is set according to the gaming state.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the activated pay line LN (hereinafter, the activated pay line LN is simply referred to as the pay line LN). Wins when a combination of symbols called "roles" is completed. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into small winning combinations with medal payout and re-starting so that the next game can be started without setting the number of bets. There are a gaming role (hereinafter, also referred to as “replay”) and a special role (hereinafter, also referred to as “bonus”) accompanied by a transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Hereinafter, the small role and the replaying role are also collectively referred to as a general role. In order for the winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win the internal lottery described later and set the winning flag of the combination in the RAM. In the following, the terms “replay combination” and “replay” are generic names for various replays shown in FIGS.

  In addition, among the winning flags of the respective roles, the winning flag of the small role and the replaying role is valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and is invalid in the next game. The combination is enabled until the combination of the permitted combinations is completed by the flag, and is invalid in the game in which the combination of the permitted combinations is completed. That is, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of combinations permitted by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. Becomes

  In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the winning of each of the above-mentioned roles is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). Is what you do. In the internal lottery, first, when the start switch 7 is detected, a random number for the internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is obtained. Specifically, the value of the random number value storage work allocated to the RAM 41c is set to the lottery work similarly allocated to the RAM 41c. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state and whether or not the special combination is carried over, the numerical data stored in the lottery work, the value of the gaming state flag for identifying the gaming state, and the RT described later are identified. The determination is performed according to the value of the RT flag, the number of bets, and the number of determination values of each combination determined according to the set value. If the special role does not win in the game that won the special role in the internal lottery, the special role is carried over to the next game and thereafter, and the special role is carried over until the special role is won. It is to maintain the winning state.

  In the internal lottery, a random number value for internal lottery (stored in a work for lottery) determines the number of determination values determined in accordance with the role to be subjected to the internal lottery, the current game state flag value, the RT flag value, and the set value. Are added in order, and when the result of the addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For this reason, the winning combination is determined based on the probability (the number of judgment values / 65536) according to the magnitude of the number of judgment values.

  When the winning of any of the winning combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the winning-determined winning combination is set in the internal winning flag storing work allocated to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work is composed of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as a special role storing work in which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is a general role winning work. Assigned as a general role storage work for which the flag is set. Specifically, when the special combination is won, the special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination has been won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. When the general role is won, a general role winning flag indicating that the general role has been won is set in the general role storing work. If no winning combination or combination of winning combinations is won, only the general combination storing work is cleared.

[Reel stop control]
Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R executed in the reel rotation process in Sd3 of FIG. 7 will be described.

  The main control unit 41 refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reels has started and when the reels have stopped and the reels that are still rotating remain. Then, a stop control table is created for each rotating reel. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the spinning reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the slippage of the stop control table referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index indicating a head address of an area storing table creation data from a reference address when referring to the table index for each setting state of a winning flag by an internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as an internal winning state). The difference up to the address where the data is stored is registered. As a result, it is possible to acquire a difference corresponding to the internal winning state, and to acquire the corresponding index data by adding the difference to the reference address. Even if the winning status of the role is different, if the same control is applied, the same address is stored as the index data. In such a case, the same table creation data is referred to. Thus, a stop control table is created.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop state.

  The stop control table referred to according to the stop state of the reels indicates whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, the left, It may differ depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any of the reels is stopped, the stop may occur. The stop control table address to be referred to for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the start address of the table creation data, the status is referred to. The address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the situation can be specified. From the specified address, it is necessary according to each situation. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Note that even when the stop status of the reels and the stop positions of the stopped reels are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In the present embodiment, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R use stepping motors that make one revolution with a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167). That is, by driving the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R by 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R make one revolution. Twenty-one areas (frames) divided into 16 steps (the number of steps in which one symbol moves) for one revolution of the reel are defined, and these areas include areas 0 to 20 from the reel reference position. A number has been assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is also 21, and the symbol numbers of 0 to 20 from the reel reference position are assigned to the symbols of each reel. , Area numbers 0 to 20 are sequentially assigned. In the stop control table, the number of sliding frames for each region number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule. By expanding the stop control table, the number of sliding frames for each region number can be obtained. I have.

  As described above, in the stop control table created with reference to the table index and the table creation data, the area corresponding to each area number is set at the stop reference position (in the present embodiment, the see-through window). 3 when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is detected at the timing (the timing at which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each area number) located at the lower symbol area (3). This is a table in which the number of frames is set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the start address of table creation data according to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, first, the table index is referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, and table creation data is specified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the specified table creation data. Acquires the address of the stop control table of each reel corresponding to the rotating state, develops the stop control table of each reel stored at the acquired address, and creates a stop control table for all reels.

  When any one of the reels stops or any two of the reels stop, the index data acquired at the start of the reel rotation, that is, the start address of the table creation data according to the internal winning state of the game. The table creation data is identified based on the table creation data, and the stopped reel and the stop control table address of the unstopped reel corresponding to the area number of the stopped position of the reel are acquired from the identified table creation data. The stop control table for each stored reel is developed to create a stop control table for the unstopped reels.

  Next, when the main control unit 41 effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the spinning reel, the control for causing the corresponding reel to derive the display result is described. More specifically, when any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effectively detected, the stop operation position is determined based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number of sliding frames corresponding to the area number at the specified stop operation position is acquired by referring to the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation has been detected. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the acquired number of sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the acquired number of sliding frames is calculated as the number of steps until the reel is stopped, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Perform control. Accordingly, the area corresponding to the area number corresponding to the area number corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in the present embodiment, the see-through window 3). (The lower symbol area).

  In the table index of the present embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop situation (and the stopped position of the stopped reel). That is, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one game state, and a stop control table corresponding to a reel stop state (and a stopped reel stop position) are uniquely defined. Is also unique for one internal winning state and one reel stop state (and a stopped reel stop position) in one game state. Therefore, when the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop state (and the stopped reel stop position) all have the same condition, the reels are controlled based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. Will be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is defined as the number of sliding frames, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing a maximum of four frame symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be specified from a range of up to five frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. Further, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to draw up to four symbols and stop the reel after detecting the stop operation. The stop position of the symbol can be designated from a maximum of five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the winning combinations has been won, the winning combinations are drawn to the pay line LN as much as possible within a range of four frames, and the unwinned roles are drawn so as not to be aligned with the winning line LN. Creates a stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined and performs stop control of the reels. If none of the roles are won, stop control in which the number of sliding frames in which none of the roles are aligned is determined A table is created and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if the winning combination in the pay-in line LN within the pull-in range of a maximum of four frames can be aligned and stopped, a control for aligning and stopping the winning combination is performed. In the case of a winning combination, a control is performed to stop in a drop-in range of a maximum of four frames.

  If the special role and the small role are elected at the same time, such as when the small role is elected while the special role has been carried over before the previous game, the winning small role is placed in the winning line LN within a range of 4 frames. The number of sliding frames is determined so as to draw in as much as possible, and for the stop operation position where the winning small role cannot be drawn within a maximum of four frames within the winning line LN, the winning special role is placed on the winning line LN. A stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so as to draw in the frame as much as possible is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when the stop operation is performed, if it is possible to stop all the winning combinations in the pay-in line LN within a pull-in range of a maximum of 4 frames, the control is performed to stop the small wins together. If it is not possible to draw a small role that has been won within a pull-in range of up to four frames on the line LN, if special roles that have been won within a pull-in range of up to four frames on the payline LN can be stopped together, A control for stopping the rolls in a row is performed, and the control for stopping the winning combination is performed within the pull-in range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the small combination with the pay line LN is given priority over the special combination, and the special combination can be won only when the small combination cannot be drawn. When the special combination and the small combination can be drawn in at the same time, only the small combination is drawn in, so that the small combination and the small combination are not aligned with the winning line LN.

  In this embodiment, the special role and the small role are simultaneously won when the small role is won while the special role is carried over from before the previous game, or when the special role and the small role are newly won at the same time. In this case, the winning small role is given priority over the winning special role, and only when the small role cannot be drawn, the special role is aligned with the winning line LN. In the case where the special combination is won at the same time, the control for aligning the special combination with the winning line LN is given priority over the small combination, and the control for aligning the small combination with the winning line LN may be performed only when the special combination cannot be drawn. .

  When the special role and the replay are elected at the same time, such as when the special role has been carried over from the previous game and the special role and the replay are elected at the same time, when the stop operation is performed, the maximum pay line LN is displayed. Control is performed in which the symbols of the replaying game are aligned and stopped within the four-frame pull-in range. In this case, the symbols that constitute the replaying game or the symbols that constitute the replaying game that is simultaneously won are arranged within 5 symbols on each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, that is, at intervals of 4 frames or less. Since the stop can be stopped at an arbitrary position within the pull-in range of 4 frames, if the special role and the replaying role are simultaneously won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. Instead, the re-game players will always win. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-game combination with the pay line LN has priority over the special combination, and the re-game combination always wins. When the special combination and the re-game combination can be drawn in at the same time, only the re-game combination is drawn in so that the special combination is not aligned with the pay line LN at the same time as the re-game combination.

  In the present embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started, the main controller 41 rotates the reels for which the stop operation has not yet been detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. And the control to stop the display result on the corresponding reel is performed on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. Even if the reel rotation is temporarily stopped due to the occurrence of the reel rotation error, the stop operation is still detected until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected after the reel rotation is restarted. On the condition that the operation of the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is detected, the control of stopping the display result on the corresponding reel is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the control for stopping the display result on the corresponding reel is performed on condition that the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected. After that, when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed, even if the reel stop operation is not performed, it is considered that the stop operation has been performed, and the automatic stop control for automatically stopping each reel is performed. You may do it. In this case, since the reels stop without the player's operation, it is preferable to derive a display result that does not constitute any combination even if any combination has been won.

  Next, various control contents executed by the main control unit 41 in the present embodiment will be described.

[Startup process (main)]
When a system reset signal is input from the reset circuit 49, the main control unit 41 performs a startup process (main) shown in the flowcharts of FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main control unit 41 first initializes the internal device, peripheral IC, interrupt mode, stack pointer, and the like (Sa2), and then initializes the values of the I register and the IY register. (Sa3). By initializing the I register and the IY register, an address of an interrupt table to be referred to when an interrupt occurs is set in the I register, and a reference address when referencing a storage area of the RAM 41c is set in the IY register. . These values are fixed values and are always initialized at startup.

  Next, access to the RAM 41c is permitted (Sa4), and RAM parities of all storage areas (including unused areas and unused stack areas) of the RAM 41c are calculated (Sa5).

  In the step Sa6, it is determined whether or not the RAM parity calculated in the step Sa5 is 0. If the power interruption interrupt processing (main) is normally performed, the RAM parity should be 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step Sa6, the data stored in the RAM 41c is not normal. In this case, after the initialization 1 for initializing all the storage areas other than the used stack area and the important work among the storage areas of the RAM 41c is executed (Sa22), it is determined whether the setting key switch 37 is turned on. (Sa23), and if the setting key switch 37 is on, a setting change start command indicating that the setting is being changed is generated (Sa19), and the generated setting change start command is stored in the command buffer (Sa20). ), The timer interrupt processing (main) executed at regular intervals (interval of 0.56 ms) by the main control unit 41 described in FIG. 8 and FIG. Allow write (Sa21), the setting change processing for such change of winning probability of winning, that is, the transition to the setting change state. When the setting change process ends, the process proceeds to a game process shown in FIG.

  If the setting key switch 37 is off in the step of Sa23, an error code indicating a RAM error is set in a register (Sa24), an error start command indicating a RAM error is generated (Sa25), and the generated error start command is Stored in a buffer (Sa26), and permit the interruption of the timer interruption process (main) executed at regular intervals (interval of 0.56 ms) by the main control unit 41 described in FIGS. 8 and 9 (Sa27). , Error processing, ie, transition to the RAM abnormal error state. Then, when the RAM abnormality error state is released, for example, by operating the reset / setting switch 38 by a game clerk, the processing shifts to the game processing shown in FIG.

  If the RAM parity is 0 in the step Sa6, it is further determined whether the destructive diagnosis data is normal or not (Sa7). If the power interruption processing (main) is performed normally, the destruction diagnosis data should have been set. If the destruction diagnosis data is not normal in the step Sa7 (the destruction diagnosis data is stored at the time of power interruption). In the case other than 5A (H), the data in the RAM 41c is not normal. Therefore, the process shifts to the step Sa22 to execute the initialization 1, and then the setting key switch 37 is turned on in the step Sa23. For example, the processing of Sa19 to Sa21 described above is performed, and the processing shifts to the setting change processing, ie, the setting change state. If the setting key switch 37 is off in the step of Sa27, the processing of Sa24 to Sa27 described above is performed, and the processing shifts to the error processing, that is, the RAM abnormal error state. Then, when the RAM abnormality error state is released, the processing shifts to the game processing shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step Sa7 that the data for destructive diagnosis is normal, the data in the RAM 41c is normal. Therefore, the data for destructive diagnosis is cleared (Sa8), and the unsaved work, unused area, and unused data in the RAM 41c are cleared. After performing initialization 3 for initializing the used stack area (Sa9), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is on (Sa10). If the setting key switch 37 is on, initialization 1 is executed. (Sa15), the above-described processes of Sa19 to Sa21 are performed, and the process shifts to a setting change process, that is, a setting change state. When the setting change process ends, the process proceeds to a game process shown in FIG.

  If the setting key switch 37 is off in the step of Sa10, each register is restored to the state before power interruption, that is, the state saved in the stack (Sa11), and the power interruption recovery 1 command (see FIG. 8) is generated. And store it in the command buffer (Sa12). Next, a power failure recovery 2 command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa13). Next, a power failure recovery 3 command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa14). Next, a power failure recovery 4 command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa15). Next, a hot start command (see FIG. 8) is generated and stored in the command buffer (Sa16). Then, the main control unit 41 described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9 permits the interruption of the timer interruption processing (main) executed at regular intervals (interval of 0.56 ms) (Sa17), The process returns to the process that was being executed. If any of the processing in the game processing shown in FIG. 7 has been performed before the power interruption, the processing of Sd1 to Sd6 of the game processing is performed based on the value of the program counter (PC) returned in Sa11. The process returns to the process performed before the power interruption. Further, for example, if any of the processes in the timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 8 and 9 is performed before the power interruption, based on the value of the program counter (PC) returned in Sa11, The process returns to the process performed before the power interruption among the processes of Sk1 to Sk26 of the timer interrupt process.

[About various commands]
Next, a command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 will be described. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub-control unit 91 includes 1-byte mode data indicating the type of command and 1-byte EXT data indicating the content of the command. The sub-control unit 91 determines the type of the command from the mode data, and determines the content of the command from the EXT data.

  Each command is temporarily stored in a command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and is executed in the command transmission processing (main) executed in the timer interruption processing (main) shown in FIGS. In Sk16), it is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

  When a command is received from the main control unit 41, the sub-control unit 91 outputs an image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, a sound output from the speakers 53 and 54, and a front door according to the type of the received command. 1b is controlled.

  The setting change start command is a command indicating that the setting change has been started. The setting change start command is transmitted at the start of the setting change. A value indicating that the setting change has been started is set in the EXT data.

  The setting change end command is a command indicating that the setting change has ended and the setting value selected by the setting change. The setting change end command is transmitted when the setting change ends. In the EXT data, one of six types of setting values selected by changing the setting is set.

  The error start command is a command indicating that an error has occurred. One of eight types of errors is set in the EXT data. The error start command is transmitted at the start of error processing. The eight types of errors include an overflow tank overflow error indicating that the medal in the overflow tank 35 is full, a payout medal no error indicating that the medal in the hopper tank 34a has run out, and a medal to be paid out is the hopper tank. A payout medal clogging error indicating that the reels are clogged at 34a or the like, a throw-in signal error error indicating that a medal detection error has occurred in the medal selector, a reel rotation error error indicating that reel rotation is not performed normally, A winning prize flag, which is expected to win based on the result of the internal lottery, and an illegal winning error indicating that the winning result actually won does not match, and an RWM content error indicating a RAM abnormality are set.

  The error release command is a command indicating that the error has been released. The error release command is transmitted when error processing is released. A value indicating that the error has been cleared is set in the EXT data.

  The settlement start command is a command indicating that the settlement of medals has started. The settlement start command is transmitted at the start of the settlement process. Either data indicating that the inserted medals have been settled or data indicating that the credited medals have been settled are set in the EXT data.

  The settlement end command is a command indicating that the settlement of medals has been completed. The settlement end command is transmitted at the end of the settlement process. A value indicating that the settlement has been completed is set in the EXT data.

  The medal insertion command is a command indicating that a medal has been inserted. The medal insertion command is transmitted when a medal is inserted without adding credits. In the EXT data, a value indicating the number of inserted medals (one of 1 to 3) is set.

  The credit increase command is a command indicating that the number of credited medals has increased. The credit increase command is transmitted when a medal is inserted with addition of a credit. A value indicating that the credit has increased is set in the EXT data.

  The game counter 1 command is a command indicating a count value of 0 to 127 which is counted every time a game is played. The game counter 1 command is transmitted when a start switch operation is received. In the EXT data, a value indicating any one of the count values of 0 to 127 is set.

  The reel acceleration information command is a command indicating that the rotation of the reel has started. The reel acceleration information command is transmitted when a start switch operation is received. In the EXT data, a value indicating one of the nine types of rotation start patterns of the reels is set.

  The internal winning command is a command indicating whether or not BB has been won and the state of the RT. The internal winning command is transmitted when the operation of the start switch is received. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not the BB has been won and a state of the RT are set.

  The winning number command is a command indicating the result of the internal lottery. The winning number command is transmitted when the operation of the start switch is received. In the EXT data, a value indicating the result of the internal lottery is set.

  The BB insertion number 1 command is a command indicating the number of medals inserted in the BB game. The BB insertion number 1 command is transmitted at the start of reel rotation. A value indicating the number of inserted medals is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop reception 1 command is a command indicating that the first stop has been performed. The reel stop reception 1 command is transmitted when a stop switch operation is received. In the EXT data, a value indicating a reception state of each stop switch (that is, whether or not the stop switch has been operated) and a lighting state of an LED built in each stop switch (whether or not lighting is being performed) are set.

  The reel sliding frame number 1 command is a command indicating the number of frames until the reel stops when the first stop is performed. The reel slip frame number 1 command is transmitted when an operation of the stop switch is received. In the EXT data, a value indicating the number of frames (0 to 4 frames) until the reel stops is set.

  The reel stop position 1 command is a command indicating the position where the reel stops when the first stop is performed. The reel stop position 1 command is transmitted when an operation of the stop switch is received. A value indicating a reel stop position (frame number 0 to 20) is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop reception 2 command is a command indicating that the second stop has been performed. The reel stop reception 2 command is transmitted when a stop switch operation is received. In the EXT data, a value indicating a reception state of each stop switch (that is, whether or not the stop switch has been operated) and a lighting state of an LED built in each stop switch (whether or not lighting is being performed) are set.

  The reel sliding frame number 2 command is a command indicating the number of frames until the reel stops when the second stop is performed. The reel slip frame number 2 command is transmitted when an operation of the stop switch is received. In the EXT data, a value indicating the number of frames (0 to 4 frames) until the reel stops is set.

  The reel stop position 2 command is a command indicating the position where the reel stops when the second stop is performed. The reel stop position 2 command is transmitted when an operation of the stop switch is received. A value indicating a reel stop position (frame number 0 to 20) is set in the EXT data.

  The reel stop reception 3 command is a command indicating that the third stop has been performed. The reel stop reception 3 command is transmitted when a stop switch operation is received. In the EXT data, a value indicating a reception state of each stop switch (that is, whether or not the stop switch has been operated) and a lighting state of an LED built in each stop switch (whether or not lighting is being performed) are set.

  The reel slip frame number 3 command is a command indicating the number of frames until the reel stops when the third stop is performed. The reel sliding frame number 3 command is transmitted when an operation of the stop switch is received. In the EXT data, a value indicating the number of frames (0 to 4 frames) until the reel stops is set.

  The reel stop position 3 command is a command indicating the position where the reel stops when the third stop is performed. The reel stop position 3 command is transmitted when an operation of the stop switch is received. A value indicating a reel stop position (frame number 0 to 20) is set in the EXT data.

  The game counter 2 command is a command indicating a count value of 0 to 127, which is counted every time a game is played. The game counter 2 command is transmitted after all reels stop. In the EXT data, a value indicating any one of the count values of 0 to 127 is set.

  The RT information 2 command is a command indicating whether or not BB has been won and the state of the RT. The RT information 2 command is transmitted when a start switch operation is received. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not the BB has been won and a state of the RT are set.

  The winning number 1 command is a command indicating the type of winning. The winning number 1 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process. In the EXT data, a value indicating the operating state of the BB (whether or not the BB is being performed) and the type of winning is set.

  The winning number 2 command is a command indicating the type of winning. The winning number 1 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process. In the EXT data, a value indicating the operating state of the BB (whether or not the BB is being performed) and the type of winning is set.

  The winning number command is a command indicating the number of medals paid out by winning. The winning number command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process. In the EXT data, a value indicating the payout number of medals is set.

  The BB payout number 1 command is a command indicating the payout number of medals at the time of BB. The BB payout number 1 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process during BB. In the EXT data, a value (upper 7 bits) indicating the number of payout medals in BB is set.

  The BB payout number 2 command is a command indicating the payout number of medals at the time of BB. The BB payout number 2 command is transmitted at the start of the medal payout process during BB. In the EXT data, a value (lower 7 bits) indicating the number of payout medals in BB is set.

  The BB end wait command is a command indicating that the BB is waiting for the end. The BB end waiting command is transmitted when BB ends. In the EXT data, a value indicating the type of BB waiting for completion (one type in the present embodiment) is set.

  The BB end command is a command indicating that the BB ends. The BB end command is transmitted at the time of BB end, at the start of automatic settlement, or at the start of stop processing. In the EXT data, a value indicating the type of BB to be ended (one type in the present embodiment) is set.

  The RT information 1 command is a command indicating the state of the RT. The RT information 1 command is transmitted at the end of the game. A value indicating the state of the RT is set in the EXT data.

  The BB operation type command is a command indicating whether or not BB is being performed. The BB operation type command is transmitted at the end of the game. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not BB is being performed is set.

  The game end command is a command indicating a game state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is ended. The game end command is transmitted when the game ends. In the EXT data, a value indicating a game state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is ended is set.

  The door command is a command indicating whether or not the front door 1b is open. The door command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the setting is changed, when the RWM content error starts, when the game ends, and when the door is opened and closed. In the EXT data, a value indicating the open state of the door (whether it is open or closed) is set.

  The power-off recovery 1 command is a command indicating a count value of 0 to 127, which is counted every time the game is played. The power-off recovery 1 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating any one of the count values of 0 to 127 is set.

  The power interruption recovery 2 command is a command indicating whether or not BB has been won and the state of the RT. The power-off recovery 2 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not the BB has been won and a state of the RT are set.

  The power interruption recovery 3 command is a command indicating whether or not BB is being performed and the number of inserted medals. The power-off recovery 3 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating whether or not BB is being performed and the number of inserted medals is set.

  The power interruption return 4 command is a command indicating a game state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is ended. The power-off recovery 4 command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating a game state (BB, RB, replay winning) when the game is ended is set.

  The hot start command is a command indicating restarting without turning off the power. The hot start command is transmitted when the backup is normal after the power is turned on. In the EXT data, a value indicating restart without turning off the power is set.

[Game processing]
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the control content of the game processing executed by the main control unit 41.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the game process, a BET process (Sd1), an internal lottery process (Sd2), a reel rotation process (Sd3), a winning determination process (Sd4), a payout process (Sd5), and a game end process (Sd6) ) Are executed in order, and when the game end processing ends, the flow returns to the BET processing again.

  In the BET process in the step Sd1, a process is executed in which the game waits in a state where the bet amount can be set, a specified number of bets is set according to the game state, and the game is started when the start switch 7 is operated. .

  In the internal lottery process in the step Sd2, it is determined whether the winning of each of the above-mentioned roles is permitted based on the random number value for the internal lottery latched at the same time as the start of the game by the detection of the start switch 7 in the step Sd1 (that is, display A process is performed to determine whether or not the derivation of the result is permitted. In the internal lottery process, a winning flag is set in the RAM 41c based on each lottery result. When a special combination (BB or RB) is won by an internal lottery, a special combination carryover flag is set. Then, as described above, the presence / absence of the special role carryover flag is determined to determine whether the special role has been carried over, and the winning role according to the presence / absence of the carryover (the special role is excluded from the internal lottery during the special role carryover). Is performed).

  In the reel rotation process in the step Sd3, the process of rotating each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R in response to the operation of the stop switch 7, the result of the internal lottery in the step Sd2, and the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R In response to the detection of the operation, a process of stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is executed.

  In the prize determination process in the step Sd4, when it is determined in the step Sd3 that the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R has stopped, a prize is won according to the display result derived on each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. A process for determining whether or not the error has occurred is executed. When the special combination is won, the special combination carry over flag is cleared in this processing.

  In the payout process in the step Sd5, when occurrence of a prize is determined in the step Sd4, processes such as credit addition and medal payout are performed based on the number of payouts according to the prize.

  In the process at the time of ending the game in the step Sd6, a process of setting a gaming state in preparation for the next game is executed.

  In the game processing, a command is generated in accordance with the progress control of the game, set in the command buffer, and transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

[Timer interrupt processing (main)]
FIGS. 8 and 9 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the timer interrupt processing (main) which is executed by the main control unit 41 interrupting the start processing and the game processing at regular intervals (interval of 0.56 ms). Note that other interrupts are automatically prohibited during the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (main).

  As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, in the timer interrupt processing (main), first, a register in use is saved in a stack area (Sk1).

  Next, a power failure determination process is performed (Sk2). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal has been input from the power interruption detection circuit 48. If the voltage drop signal has been input, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal has been input in the previous power failure determination process. If a voltage drop signal is also input in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power interruption flag indicating that fact is set.

  After the power failure determination process in step Sk2, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (Sk3). If the power failure flag is not set, the process proceeds to Sk4, and the power failure flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to the power interruption processing (main).

  In step Sk4, a port input process of inputting detection data of various switches from an input port is performed.

  Next, the branch counter for identifying the timer interrupt to be executed in the timer interrupt processing (main) from the four types of timer interrupts 1 to 4 is advanced by 1 (Sk5). In this embodiment, the timer interrupt 1 is a branching process during the timer interrupt for controlling the motor to start the reels. Specifically, the processes of Sk9 to Sk11 such as a reel start process described later. Is performed. Timer interrupt 2 is a branching process during timer interrupt for controlling LED display, updating a time counter, monitoring a door open / close state, controlling output of control signals and the like, and updating commands and external output signals. Specifically, processes of Sk12 to Sk17, such as an LED dynamic display process described later, are performed. The timer interrupt 3 is a branching process during the timer interrupt for detecting the passage of the origin of the reel, monitoring a switch input, and reading a random number value. Processing of Sk20 to Sk22 such as time processing is performed. The timer interrupt 4 is a branching process during the timer interrupt for detecting the input of the stop switch and performing the stop control of the reel. More specifically, the processes of Sk23 to Sk25 such as a stop switch process described later. Is performed. In step Sk5, 1 is added when the branch counter value is 0 to 2, and is updated to 0 when the branch value is 3. That is, the branch counter value loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0... Every time the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed.

  Next, it is determined whether the timer interrupt is 2 or 3, that is, timer interrupt 3 or timer interrupt 4 with reference to the branch counter value (Sk6). In the case of 1 or timer interrupt 2, it is checked whether or not the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are starting or rotating at a constant speed, and if the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are starting or rotating at a constant speed. For example, a motor phase signal output process for outputting the phase signal data changed in the motor step process of Sk10 described later and the phase signal data changed in the final stop process of Sk24 described later is executed (Sk7).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is 1 by referring to the branch counter value, that is, whether or not it is the timer interrupt 2 (Sk8). If it is not the timer interrupt 2, that is, if it is the timer interrupt 1, the reel motor Reel start processing (Sk9) for controlling the step time interval at the start of 32L, 32C, 32R, motor step processing (Sk10) for changing the phase signal data of reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel motors 32L, 32C , 32R, after a predetermined time has elapsed, a motor phase signal standby process (Sk11) for changing the phase signal to one-phase excitation is sequentially performed, and then the process proceeds to Sk25.

  In the case of timer interrupt 2 in step Sk8, an LED dynamic display process (Sk12) for dynamically lighting various indicators and a control signal output process for outputting data such as lighting signals of various LEDs to an output port. (Sk13), a time counter update process for updating various time counters (Sk14), monitoring of the detection state of the door open detection switch 25, a door monitoring process for requesting the transmission of a door command (Sk15), and a command buffer. After sequentially executing a command transmission process (Sk16) for transmitting various commands such as a setting change command, a return command, and an error command to the sub-control unit 91 and an external output signal update process (Sk17) for updating an external output signal, Sk25 is executed. Proceed to step.

  If the timer interrupt is the timer interrupt 3 or the timer interrupt 4 in the step of Sk6, it is further determined whether or not the timer interrupt is 3 with reference to the branch counter value, that is, whether or not the timer interrupt 4 (Sk18). If it is not the interrupt 4, that is, if it is the timer interrupt 3, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is checked for passing through the origin (passing the reel reference position), and the occurrence of the reel rotation error is detected and stopped. Check that the preparation is completed (whether the stop preparation completion code is set). If the preparation for stopping is completed and the motor is rotating at a constant speed, operate the stop switch corresponding to the reel being rotated. Origin passing processing (Sk20) to be activated, whether the detection state of switches such as the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R has changed. After performing a switch input determination process (Sk21) for requesting the transmission of a constant, operation detection command, and the like, and a random value reading process (Sk22) for reading numerical data from the random value register R1D and storing the data in a random value storage work, Sk26 is performed. Proceed to step.

  In addition, if the timer interrupt is 4 in the step of Sk18, when the stop operation position is stored in the work of the stop reel with the detection of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the stop stored in the work of the stop reel is performed. A stop switch process (Sk23) for determining a stop position from the operation position and calculating how many steps to stop after, counting the number of steps until the stop calculated in the stop switch process, and when it is time to stop. A stop process (Sk24) for starting the braking by two-phase excitation, a final stop process (Sk25) for three-phase excitation after a predetermined time from the start of the brake in the stop process, and then the process proceeds to Sk26.

  In step Sk26, the register saved in the stack area in Sk1 is restored, and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

[Types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a winning is achieved when a predetermined symbol combination is arranged on the winning line LN. The types of winning combinations are determined according to the game state, but can be broadly divided into bonuses involving shifting to big bonuses and regular bonuses, small roles involving payouts of medals, and setting of the number of bets. There are replays that allow the next game to be started without need.

  The big bonus may be indicated as BB and the regular bonus may be indicated as RB. In addition, the big bonus and the regular bonus may be simply referred to as a bonus. In order for the winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to set a winning flag in the RAM 41c to allow the winning of the combination by winning the internal lottery.

  10 to 13 are diagrams for explaining types of winning combinations, symbol combinations of winning combinations, and technical matters related to the winning combinations. FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state and the RT controlled by the main control unit 41.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the slot machine according to the present embodiment is controlled to one of a normal gaming state, 1, 2, RB, and BB (RB) inside the normal gaming state. In this case, it is controlled to any one of RT0 to RT4.

  As shown in FIG. 10, two types of bonuses among the winning combinations include a big bonus (hereinafter, each big bonus is referred to as BB) and a regular bonus (hereinafter, each regular bonus is referred to as RB). included.

  BB is won when the combination of "white 7-white 7-white 7" is completed on the pay line LN. The RB is awarded when the combination of "black 7-black 7-BAR" is arranged on the winning line LN.

  When the BB wins, the game shifts to a big bonus that is controlled for each game during the BB regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as BBRB). The big bonus ends when 316 or more medals have been paid out.

  When the RB wins, the game shifts to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB). The regular bonus is terminated on condition that one of the winning combinations wins six times or 12 games are completed.

  As shown in FIG. 14, from the time when the BB is internally won until a prize is won, the inside is controlled to 1 · RT0, and from the time when the RB is internally won until the prize is won, the inside is controlled to 2 · RT0. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, after the big bonus or the regular bonus (collectively referred to as a bonus) is completed, the control is controlled to the normal RT4.

  Even if one of BB and RB is won in the internal lottery described later, if the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is not operated at an appropriate timing to enable the winning of these roles, the winning of these roles is achieved. Never. The symbols ("black 7", "white 7", "net 7") constituting BB and RB are not arranged within 5 frames on each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. It is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the small winning combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the small roles include middle bell, falling bell, upper bell 1-8, middle watermelon, falling watermelon, upper watermelon, lower cherry, middle cherry, single role, rising bell, rising bevel, Includes upward-sloping ribes.

  The middle bell is awarded when the combination of "bell-bell-bell" is completed on the winning line LN, and eight medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell is arranged within 5 frames on each of the left reel 2L, the center reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Therefore, when a middle bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, in principle, a win can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  A downward-sloping bell is generated when any combination of “Replay-Bell-Replay”, “Replay-Bell-Plum”, “Plum-Bell-Replay”, and “Plum-Bell-Plum” is completed on the payline LN. A prize will be won and eight medals will be paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the replay and the plum of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position below the bell, and the replay and the plum of the right reel 2R are arranged at a position above the bell. Therefore, if any of the combinations of “replay-bell-replay”, “replay-bell-plum”, “plum-bell-replay”, and “plum-bell-plum” is completed, “bell-bell-bell” Are aligned to the lower right, that is, the invalid line LM3.

  In addition, one of the plum and the replay is arranged within 5 frames on each of the left reel 2L and the right reel 2R, and the bell is arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C. For this reason, when a downward-sloping bell is won in an internal lottery described later, it can be said that, in principle, a role can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Next, the upper bells 1 to 8 will be described. The upper bell 1 wins when the combination of “Replay-Orange-Orange” is completed on the winning line LN. The upper bell 2 wins when the combination of “Replay-Orange-BAR” is completed on the winning line LN. The upper bell 3 wins when the combination of “Replay-BAR-Orange” is completed on the winning line LN. The upper bell 4 wins when the combination of “Replay-BAR-BAR” is completed on the winning line LN. The upper bell 5 wins when the combination of “plum-orange-orange” is completed on the winning line LN. The upper bell 6 wins when the combination of “plum-orange-BAR” is completed on the winning line LN. The upper bell 7 wins when the combination of “Plum-BAR-Orange” is completed on the winning line LN. The upper bell 8 wins when the combination of “Plum-BAR-BAR” is completed on the winning line LN.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, since the replay and plum of the left reel 2L, the BAR and orange of the middle reel, and the BAR and orange of the right reel 2R are arranged at positions one below the bell, "Replay- "Orange-Orange", "Replay-Orange-BAR", "Replay-BAR-Orange", "Replay-BAR-BAR", "Plum-Orange-Orange", "Plum-Orange-BAR", "Plum-BAR-" When any of the combinations of “orange” and “plum-BAR-BAR” is completed, the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is aligned with the upper row, that is, the invalid line LM1.

  In the left reel 2L, replays and plums are not arranged within five frames, and orange and BAR are not arranged within five frames for each of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R. For this reason, even if one of the upper bells 1 to 8 is won in the internal lottery described later, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the configuration symbols of the won upper bell must be operated at appropriate timing. If you win, you won't win the top bell.

  The middle watermelon is awarded when the combination of “black 7-watermelon-watermelon”, “white 7-watermelon-watermelon”, and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is completed on the winning line LN. When the middle watermelon wins, 5 medals will be paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, in the left reel 2L, any of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, but for each of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, Not placed within 5 frames. For this reason, even if the middle watermelon is won in the internal lottery described later, the middle watermelon will not be won unless the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are operated at appropriate timing. .

  The watermelon descending right is awarded when the combination of "bell-watermelon-black 7" and "bell-watermelon-white 7" is completed on the payline LN. When the watermelon descending right wins, 5 medals will be paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position below one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon, and black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2R are watermelon. Are arranged one position above, the combination of “Bell-watermelon-black 7” and “Bell-watermelon-white 7” indicates “black 7-watermelon-watermelon”, “white The combination of “7-watermelon-watermelon” and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” are lowered to the right, that is, aligned with the invalid line LM3.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within five frames, but the watermelon of the middle reel 2C and the black 7 and white 7 of the right reel 2R are not arranged within five frames. For this reason, even if a watermelon descending to the right is won in an internal lottery described later, if the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are not operated at an appropriate timing, a watermelon descending to the right can be won. There is no.

  The upper watermelon is awarded when the combination of "bell-black 7-replay" and "bell-white 7-replay" is completed on the payline LN. When the upper watermelon wins, 5 medals will be paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is disposed at a position below one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon, and black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C are watermelon. And the replay of the right reel 2R is located one position below the watermelon, so that "bell-black 7-replay" and "bell-white 7-replay" When any of the combinations is completed, the combination of “black 7-watermelon-watermelon”, “white 7-watermelon-watermelon”, and “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned in the upper row, that is, the invalid line LM1.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, but the replay of the black 7 and white 7 of the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R is not arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, even if an upper watermelon is won in an internal lottery described later, the upper watermelon will not be won unless the stop switches 8C and 8R corresponding to the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R are operated at appropriate timing. .

  The lower cherry is awarded when the combination of "BAR-Orange-ANY (ANY is acceptable)", "BAR-BAR-ANY", and "BAR-Bell-ANY" is completed on the winning line LN. . When the lower cherry wins, two medals will be paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, since the BAR of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the cherry, "BAR-orange-ANY (ANY can be any symbol)", "BAR-Orange-ANY" When any of the combinations of “BAR-ANY” and “BAR-Bell-ANY” is completed, “Cherry” on the left reel stops at the lower row, and the combination of “Cherry-ANY-ANY” rises to the lower row and rises to the right. That is, they are aligned with the invalid lines LM2 and LM4.

  In the middle reel 2C, any of orange, BAR, and bell is arranged within five frames, but in the left reel 2L, BAR is not arranged within five frames. For this reason, even if the lower cherry is won in the internal lottery described later, the lower cherry is not won unless the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is operated at an appropriate timing.

  The middle cherry is won when the combination of “Cherry-ANY-ANY” is completed on the pay line LN. When the middle cherry wins, one medal will be paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, cherries are not arranged within five frames on the left reel 2L. For this reason, even if the middle cherry is won in the internal lottery described later, the middle cherry is not won unless the stop switch 8L corresponding to the left reel 2L is operated at an appropriate timing.

  One winning combination is won when the combination of "black 7-cherry-net 7" is completed on the pay line LN. When one winning combination is won, one medal is paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the black 7 of the left reel 2L, the cherry of the middle reel, and the net 7 of the right reel are not arranged within five frames. For this reason, even if the player wins one copy in the internal lottery described later, if the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R are not operated at appropriate timing, 1 There is no prize winning.

  The rising bells are “black 7-bell-orange”, “white 7-bell-orange”, “watermelon-bell-orange”, “black 7-bell-BAR”, “white 7-bell-orange” on the payline LN. When one of the combinations of “BAR” and “watermelon-bell-BAR” is completed, a prize is won and ten medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the black 7, white 7, and watermelon of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position one above the bell, and the orange and BAR of the right reel 2R are arranged below the bell. Since it is located at the position, "black 7-bell-orange", "white 7-bell-orange", "watermelon-bell-orange", "black 7-bell-BAR", "white 7-bell-BAR" , "Watermelon-bell-BAR", the combination of "bell-bell-bell" rises to the right, that is, is aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  One of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C, and orange and BAR are arranged on the right reel 2R. One of them is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, when an upward-swing bell is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, in principle, a role can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The upward-sloping bevel is awarded when any of the combinations of “black 7-bell-bell”, “white 7-bell-bell”, and “watermelon-bell-bell” is completed on the payline LN, and 10 Medals will be paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the black 7, white 7, and watermelon of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position one level above the bell, and the bell of the right reel 2R is arranged at a position below the replay or plum. Since any of the combinations of “black 7-bell-bell”, “white 7-bell-bell”, and “watermelon-bell-bell” are aligned, “bell-bell-replay”, “ The combination of "bell-bell-plum" rises to the right, that is, aligns with the invalid line LM4.

  In the left reel 2L, one of black 7, white 7, and watermelon is arranged within 5 frames, and in the middle reel 2C and the right reel 2R, the bell is arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when an upward-sloping bevel is won in an internal lottery described later, the winning can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The upward-sloping rebebe wins when one of the combinations of “bell-bell-orange” and “bell-bell-BAR” is completed on the payline LN, and ten medals are paid out.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or the plum, and the orange and BAR of the right reel 2R are arranged at a position below the bell. Therefore, if any combination of "Bell-Bell-Orange" and "Bell-Bell-BAR" is completed, the combination of "Replay-Bell-Bell" and "Plum-Bell-Bell" rises to the right, that is, is invalid. It will be aligned with line LM4.

  The bell is arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L and the middle reel 2C, and one of orange and BAR is arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R. For this reason, it can be said that, in principle, when an upward-sloping rebebe is won in an internal lottery described later, the winning can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the replaying combination among the winning combinations will be described. Among the winning combinations, the replaying combinations include a normal replay, a lower replay, a fall replay, a promotion replay 1, 2, a special replay, and an SP (special) replay.

  The normal replay is won when the combination of “replay-replay-replay”, “replay-replay-plum”, “plum-replay-replay”, and “plum-replay-plum” is completed on the payline LN. Replays and plums are arranged within 5 frames on each of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Therefore, in the case of the normal replay, it can be said that, in principle, if a winning is achieved, the winning can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  In the lower replay, "Bell-orange-orange", "Bell-orange-cherry", "Bell-orange-watermelon", "Bell-orange-black 7", "Bell-orange-net 7", "Bell-orange-white 7", "Bell-BAR-orange", "Bell-BAR-cherry", "Bell-BAR-watermelon", "Bell-BAR-black 7", "Bell-BAR-net 7" , "Bell-BAR-White 7" is awarded.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or the plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged at a position one above the replay. "Bell-orange-orange", "bell-orange-cherry", "bell-orange-watermelon", "bell-orange-black 7", "bell-orange-net 7", "bell-orange- "White 7", "Bell-BAR-Orange", "Bell-BAR-Cherry", "Bell-BAR-watermelon", "Bell-BAR-Black 7", "Bell-BAR-Net 7", "Bell-BAR" If any combination of “White 7” is prepared, “Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / Cherry / Net 7 / White 7” and “Replay-Plum-Replay-Replay-Watermelon / Replay / Plum / H Lee / net 7 / white 7 "," plum-replay-replay-replay-watermelon / replay / plum / cherry / net 7 / white 7 "," plum-plum-replay-replay-watermelon / replay / plum / cherry / The combination of “network 7 / white 7” is aligned with the lower row, that is, the invalid line LM2.

  In the left reel 2L, the bell is arranged within 5 frames, in the middle reel, orange and BAR are arranged in 5 frames, and in the right reel 2R, orange, cherry, watermelon, black 7, net 7 are arranged. , White 7 are arranged within 5 frames. For this reason, when a lower replay is won in an internal lottery described later, it can be said that, in principle, a win can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  The falling replay is a winning when the combination of "bell-replay-bell" is completed on the pay line LN.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or the plum, and the bell of the right reel 2R is arranged at a position below the replay. Therefore, when the combination of "Bell-Replay-Bell" is completed, the combinations of "Replay-Replay-Replay", "Replay-Replay-Plum", "Plum-Replay-Replay", and "Plum-Replay-Plum" rise to the right. In other words, they are aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  The bell is arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L, the replay is arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel, and the bell is arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R. For this reason, when a fall replay is won in an internal lottery described later, it can be said that, in principle, a win can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning the fall replay in the normal RT0, the control is controlled to RT1.

  The promotion replay 1 is a prize when the combination of “replay-replay-bell” and “plum-replay-bell” is completed on the payline LN. One of the replay and the plum is arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L, the replay is arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C, and the bell is arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R. ing. Therefore, it can be said that the promotion replay 1 is, in principle, a winning combination that can be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R if the winning is achieved.

  Promotional replay 2 is performed when any of the combinations of “Bell-Orange-Replay”, “Bell-Orange-Plum”, “Bell-BAR-Replay”, and “Bell-BAR-Plum” is completed on the payline LN. It will be a prize.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the bell of the left reel 2L is arranged at a position one above the replay or the plum, and the orange and BAR of the middle reel 2C are arranged at a position one above the replay. Since the replays and plums on the right reel 2R are located one position above the bell, "bell-orange-replay", "bell-orange-plum", "bell-BAR-replay", "bell-orange-plum" When the combination of "bell-BAR-plum" is completed, the combinations of "replay-replay-bell" and "plum-replay-bell" are aligned in the lower row, that is, the invalid line LM2.

  The bell is arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L, the orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel, and the replay and the plum are arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R. ing. For this reason, when the promotion replay 2 is won in the internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, in principle, the winning can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning the promotion replay (promotion replay 1 or promotion replay 2) in the normal RT1, the control is controlled to the normal RT0. As described later, the promotion replay is set so as not to win alone in the internal lottery in the normal / RT2, the normal / RT3, and the normal / RT4. In addition, when the special combination and the promotion replay are simultaneously won in the internal lottery in the normal / RT2, the normal / RT3, and the normal / RT4, the control is controlled to 1 / RT0 or 2 / RT0 at that time. For this reason, the promotion replay does not win in the normal RT2, the normal RT3, and the normal RT4. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled from the normal / RT2, the normal / RT3, and the normal / RT4 to the normal / RT0, and the promotion replay winning only when the normal / RT1 is performed, and the normal / RT0 only from the normal / RT1. Is configured to be controlled.

  The special replay is won when the combination of "Bell-Replay-Replay" and "Bell-Replay-Plum" is completed on the payline LN. The bell is arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L, the replay is arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel 2C, and the replay and one of the plums are arranged within 5 frames on the right reel 2R. ing. Therefore, as for the special replay, it can be said that, in principle, if a winning is achieved, the winning can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning the special replay in the normal RT1 and the normal RT3, the control is controlled to the normal RT2. After winning the special replay in the normal RT2, the game is controlled to the normal RT1. As described later, the special replay is set so as not to win alone in the internal lottery in the normal / RT1 and the normal / RT4. When the special combination and the special replay are simultaneously won in the internal lottery in the normal / RT1 and the normal / RT4, the control is controlled to 1 / RT0 or 2 / RT0 at that time. Therefore, no special replay is won in the normal RT1 and the normal RT4. As a result, it is configured not to be controlled from the normal / RT1 and the normal / RT4 to the normal / RT2. Only when the normal / RT0 and the normal / RT3 are selected, a special replay is won. Only the normal / RT2 is configured.

  The SP replay includes "replay-orange-black 7", "replay-orange-net 7", "replay-orange-white 7", "replay-orange-plum", "replay-BAR-black 7" on the payline LN. , "Replay-BAR-Net 7", "Replay-BAR-White 7", "Replay-BAR-Plum", "Plum-Orange-Black 7", "Plum-Orange-Net 7", "Plum-Orange" Any one of “white 7”, “plum-orange-plum”, “plum-BAR-black 7”, “plum-BAR-net 7”, “plum-BAR-white 7”, “plum-BAR-plum” Wins when the combination of is completed.

  Here, referring to FIG. 3, the replay and the plum of the left reel 2L are arranged at a position one above the orange and BAR, and the black 7, net 7, white 7, and plum of the right reel 2R are orange. , One bar below the BAR, so that “orange-orange-orange”, “orange-orange-BAR”, “orange-BAR-BAR”, “BAR-orange-orange”, “BAR-orange” The combination of “−BAR” and “BAR-BAR-BAR” rises to the right, that is, is aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  Replays and plums are arranged within 5 frames on the left reel 2L, orange and BAR are arranged within 5 frames on the middle reel, and black 7, net 7, white 7, and black 7 are arranged on the right reel 2R. Plums are located within 5 frames. For this reason, when an SP replay is won in an internal lottery to be described later, it can be said that, in principle, a win can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after winning the SP replay in the normal RT2, the control is controlled to the normal RT3. As described later, the SP replay is set so as not to win alone in the internal lottery in the normal / RT0, the normal / RT1, and the normal / RT4. When the special combination and the SP replay are simultaneously won in the internal lottery in the normal / RT0, the normal / RT1, and the normal / RT4, the control is controlled to 1 / RT0 or 2 / RT0 at that time. Therefore, the SP replay does not win in the normal / RT0, the normal / RT1, and the normal / RT4. As a result, the normal / RT0, the normal / RT1, and the normal / RT4 are not controlled from the normal / RT3, and the SP replay wins only when the normal / RT2 is set, and the normal / RT3 only from the normal / RT2. Is configured to be controlled. When a special replay is won in the normal RT3, the normal RT3 is maintained.

  Next, the transition outcome will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the transition outcomes are "Replay-Orange-Bell", "Replay-BAR-Bell", "Plum-Orange-Bell", "Plum-BAR-Bell", and "Replay-Bell-Orange". "," Replay-Bell-BAR "," Plum-Bell-Orange "," Plum-Bell-BAR "," Black 7-Orange-Orange "," Black 7-Orange-BAR "," Black 7-BAR- " "Orange", "black 7-BAR-BAR", "white 7-orange-orange", "white 7-orange-BAR", "white 7-BAR-orange", "white 7-BAR-BAR", "watermelon" -Orange-orange "," watermelon-orange-BAR "," watermelon-BAR-orange ", and" watermelon-BAR-BAR ". In the present embodiment, left bells 1-4, middle bells 1-4, and right bells 1-4, which will be described later, are elected. When the bell is missed, the above-mentioned transition outcome is aligned with the pay line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 14, after the transition outcome is aligned with the pay line LN in the normal / RT0, the normal / RT2, the normal / RT3, and the normal / RT4, the normal / RT1 is controlled. In addition, when the transition outcome is aligned with the pay line LN in the normal RT1, the normal RT1 is maintained.

  Next, a description will be given of combinations of lottery targets to be read as lottery targets for each gaming state. In the present embodiment, the gaming state is a normal gaming state, 1 in the inside (state in which BB is won), 2 in the inside (state in which RB is won), BB ( RB) or RB, the role to be subjected to the internal lottery and the winning probability differ. Furthermore, if the gaming state is the normal gaming state, at least one of the re-gaming role and the winning probability of the internal lottery is different depending on the type of RT0 to RT4. As will be described later, a plurality of winning combinations can be simultaneously read out as the lottery target combinations, and can be repeatedly won. By writing "+" between winning combinations, it is shown that the combination is read out simultaneously as a lottery target in the internal lottery.

  When it is normal RT0, BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle cherry, BB + 1 sheet role, BB + normal replay, BB + falling replay, BB + promotion replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 sheet role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle Bell 4, Right Bell 1, Right Bell 2, Right Bell 3, Right Bell 4, Weak Watermelon, Strong Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, Single, Replay GR11, Replay GR12, Replay GR13, Replay GR14 , Replay GR15, replay GR16, replay GR21, replay GR22, replay GR23, rep Lee GR24, becomes replay GR25 is the subject role of internal lottery.

  In addition, the weak watermelon is the upper watermelon + the lower right watermelon. That is, when the upper watermelon wins, it can be recognized that it is a weak watermelon. The strong watermelon is a middle watermelon + a watermelon falling to the right. That is, when the middle watermelon wins, it can be recognized that it is a strong watermelon. The weak cherry is the lower cherry alone, and the strong cherry is the lower cherry plus one. In the weak cherry, the combination of “BAR-BAR-BAR” can be recognized in the middle row to recognize that the cherry is weak. On the other hand, the cherry stops at the lower row of the left reel 2L, and “BAR-BAR” appears in the middle row. The combination of “-BAR” makes it possible to recognize the strong cherry.

  The promotion replay is promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2. The bell is a middle bell plus a downward-sloping bell. The left bell 1 is a lower right bell + an upper bell 5 + an upper bell 8, the left bell 2 is a lower right bell + an upper bell 6 + an upper bell 7, and the left bell 3 is a lower right bell + an upper bell. 2 + upper bell 3 and left bell 4 are lower right bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4. The left bells 1 to 4 are also simply referred to as left bells. The middle bell 1 is a middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 5, the middle bell 2 is a middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 6, and the middle bell 3 is a middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell. 7, and the middle bell 4 is a middle bell + an upper bell 3 + an upper bell 8. The middle bells 1 to 4 are also simply called middle bells. The right bell 1 is a middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 5, the right bell 2 is a middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 7, and the right bell 3 is a middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell. 6, the right bell 4 is a middle bell + an upper bell 2 + an upper bell 8. The right bells 1 to 4 are also simply called right bells. The left bells 1-4, the middle bells 1-4, and the right bells 1-4 are also simply referred to as a pushing order bell.

  Replay GR11 is fall replay + promotion replay 2, replay GR12 is fall replay + promotion replay 2 + normal replay, replay GR13 is fall replay + promotion replay 1, and replay GR14 is fall Replay + promotion replay 1 + normal replay, replay GR15 is fall replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2, and replay GR16 is fall replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2 + normal replay.

  The replay GR21 is a fall replay + special replay, the replay GR22 is a fall replay + special replay + normal replay, the replay GR23 is a fall replay + special replay + lower replay, and the replay GR24 is The fall replay + special replay + normal replay + lower replay, and the replay GR25 is a fall replay + special replay + promotion replay 1.

  When it is normal / RT1, BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle cherry, BB + 1 sheet role, BB + normal replay, BB + fall replay, BB + promotion replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 sheet role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle Bell 4, Right Bell 1, Right Bell 2, Right Bell 3, Right Bell 4, Weak Watermelon, Strong Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, Single Role, Normal Replay, Replay GR1, Replay GR2, Replay GR3 , The replay GR4, the replay GR5, and the replay GR6 are targets of the internal lottery.

  Replay GR1 is normal replay + promotion replay 1, replay GR2 is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2, replay GR3 is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + lower replay, replay GR4 Is normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2 + lower replay, replay GR5 is normal replay + promotion replay 2, and replay GR6 is normal replay + promotion replay 2 + lower replay.

  When it is normal RT2, BB, BB + weak watermelon, BB + strong watermelon, BB + weak cherry, BB + strong cherry, BB + middle cherry, BB + 1 sheet role, BB + normal replay, BB + fall replay, BB + promotion replay, BB + special replay, BB + SP Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 sheet role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle Bell 4, Right Bell 1, Right Bell 2, Right Bell 3, Right Bell 4, Weak Watermelon, Strong Watermelon, Weak Cherry, Strong Cherry, Middle Cherry, Single Role, Normal Replay, Replay GR31, Replay GR32, Replay GR33 , The replay GR34, the replay GR35, and the replay GR36 are targets of the internal lottery.

  The replay GR31 is a special replay + SP replay + normal replay, the replay GR32 is a special replay + SP replay + normal replay + falling replay, the replay GR33 is a special replay + SP replay + lower replay, and a replay GR34. Is special replay + SP replay + lower replay + fall replay, replay GR35 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay, and replay GR36 is special replay + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay + It is a fall replay.

  Normal / RT3, BB, BB + Low watermelon, BB + High watermelon, BB + Low cherry, BB + High cherry, BB + Middle cherry, BB + 1 sheet role, BB + Normal replay, BB + Fall replay, BB + Promotion replay, BB + Special replay, BB + SP Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 sheet role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, Middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, single role, replay GR31, replay GR32, replay GR33, replay GR34 , The replay GR35, the replay GR36, and the SP replay are subject to the internal lottery.

  Normal / RT4, BB, BB + Low watermelon, BB + High watermelon, BB + Low cherry, BB + High cherry, BB + Middle cherry, BB + 1 sheet role, BB + Normal replay, BB + Fall replay, BB + Promotion replay, BB + Special replay, BB + SP Replay, RB, RB + strong watermelon, RB + weak cherry, RB + strong cherry, RB + 1 sheet role, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, The middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, single role, and normal replay are the target roles for the internal lottery.

  When it is 1 / RT0 in the inside and 2 / RT0 in the inside, bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right Bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, weak watermelon, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, single role, normal replay, lower replay, SP replay, fall replay, promotion replay, special Replays are eligible for internal lottery.

  When it is BB (RB) / RT0, the weak cherry and all the roles are targets of the internal lottery. When it is RB / RT0, all the roles, RB bell 1, RB bell 2, and RB bell 3 are the targets of the internal lottery. Becomes

  All roles are all small roles other than the upward-sloping bevel, that is, middle bell + right-down bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + Lower right watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherries + middle cherries + 1 sheet + right-up bell + right-up ribebe.

  RB bell 1 is a rising bell + right rising ribebe, RB bell 2 is a right rising bell + right rising ribebe + right rising berili, and RB bell 3 is all small roles, that is, a middle bell. + Lower Bell + Upper Bell 1 + Upper Bell 2 + Upper Bell 3 + Upper Bell 4 + Upper Bell 5 + Upper Bell 6 + Upper Bell 7 + Upper Bell 8 + Middle Watermelon + Lower Watermelon + Upper Watermelon + Lower Cherry + Middle Cherry + 1 Sheet + Upper Right Bell + rising bevel + rising right.

  In addition, in normal, RT0 to 4, etc., a weak watermelon, a strong watermelon, a weak cherry, a strong cherry, a middle cherry, a single role, a normal replay, a fall replay, a promotion replay, an SP replay that can be simultaneously won with either BB or RB The judgment value numbers are as follows: in the internal 1 / RT0 and internal 2 / RT0, each is read separately from the special role, strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, single role, normal replay, falling Since it is added to replay, promotion replay, and SP replay, the winning probability of each of the strong watermelon, weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry, single role, normal replay, fall replay, promotion replay, and SP replay will be constant. Is secured.

  As described above, the target role of the internal lottery differs depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, 1, 2 in the inside, BB (RB), or RB, and BB (RB) In the RB or the RB, the internal lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning probability of the small role is set higher than the normal gaming state and the inside.

  In addition, when the gaming state is the inside middle 1 and 2, the target role of the internal lottery does not change depending on whether the inside is 1 or the inside 2 or not, but the inside lot is 1 or the inside middle. The internal lottery is performed using a lottery table in which the winning probability of the target replaying game is different depending on whether it is 2.

  In addition, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the re-game combination to be subjected to the internal lottery differs depending on whether any of RT0 to RT4, and the target is determined depending on whether any of RT0 to RT4. The internal lottery is performed using the lottery table having different re-gaming combinations and winning probabilities.

  As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of types of small wins (bells) and a plurality of types of replays are simultaneously elected, the type of the winning small role or replays and the stop type are selected. A control is performed in which the symbol combination of the small winning combination and the symbol combination of the replaying combination determined according to the pressing order of the switches 8L, 8C, 8R are aligned with the winning line LN within a pull-in range of a maximum of 4 frames and stopped. Therefore, the types of small wins and replays that are simultaneously won will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17. FIG. 15 shows a list of small wins and replays that are simultaneously won. FIG. 16 shows reel control when a plurality of replays are simultaneously won, and FIG. 17 shows reel control when a plurality of small wins are simultaneously won.

  As shown in FIG. 16, when the replay GR1 (normal replay + promotion replay 1) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, and right, a combination of the promoted replay 1 among the replayed winnings is won. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left, middle, and right positions, control is performed to align the normal replay combinations with the payline LN and stop.

  When the replay GR2 (normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the left / right middle order, the combination of the promoted replay 1 among the replayed winnings is aligned with the winning line LN. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left and right directions, the control for stopping the replay is performed by aligning the combination of the normal replays with the pay line LN.

  When the replay GR3 (normal replay + promotion replay 1 + lower replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the middle left / right order, the combination of the promoted replay 1 among the replayed players selected is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If a stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle and left and right, a control for stopping the normal replay combination with the pay line LN is performed.

  When the replay GR4 (normal replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2 + lower replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, and middle, the combination of the promotion replay 1 among the replayed players that have been won is placed on the winning line LN. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the center right and left, control is performed to align and stop the normal replay combination with the payline LN.

  When the replay GR5 (Normal Replay + Promotion Replay 2) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, control is performed so that the combination of the promoted Replay 2 among the winning replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed in an order other than right, left, or middle, control is performed so that the combination of normal replays is aligned with the payline LN and stopped.

  When the replay GR6 (normal replay + promotion replay 2 + lower replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left, the combination of the promoted replay 2 among the replayed winnings is aligned with the winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed in an order other than right, middle, and left, control is performed to align the normal replay combinations with the payline LN and stop.

  As shown in FIG. 3, symbols constituting the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2, and the normal replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. In accordance with the operation order, the reel control is performed so that the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2, or the normal replay always wins regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As described above, different operation modes are set as the operation modes for winning the promotion replays 1 and 2 in the replays GR1 to GR6.

  For this reason, in the normal RT1 in which the replays GR1 to 6 are subjected to the internal lottery, if any of the replays GR1 to GR6 has been won, the promotion replay will win with a probability of 1/6, and the normal RT0 Will be migrated.

  When the replay GR11 (falling replay + promotion replay 2) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of left, right, middle, and right, the combination of the promoted replay 2 among the winning replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left, middle, and right, the control is performed so that the combination of the fall replay is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the replay GR12 (falling replay + promotion replay 2 + normal replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the left / right middle order, the combination of the promoted replay 2 among the replayed players that have been won is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If a stop operation is performed in an order other than the left and right directions, a control for stopping the fall replay combination in line with the pay line LN is performed.

  When the replay GR13 (falling replay + promotion replay 1) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle left / right order, control is performed so that the combination of the promoted replay 1 among the winning replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle and left and right, the fall replay combination is controlled to be aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the replay GR14 (falling replay + promotion replay 1 + normal replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of middle right and left, the combination of the promoted replay 1 among the replayed players that have won is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. If the stop operation is performed in an order other than the right, left, and center, the control is performed so that the combination of the fall replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the replay GR15 (falling replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, the combination of the promoted replay 2 among the replayed winnings is aligned with the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than right and left, control is performed to align the combination of the fall replays with the pay line LN and stop.

  When the replay GR16 (falling replay + promotion replay 1 + promotion replay 2 + normal replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the right-middle-left order, the combination of the promotion replay 2 among the re-played players that have won is awarded to the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than right, middle, and left, a control is performed to align the combination of the fall replays with the pay line LN and stop.

  As shown in FIG. 3, symbols constituting the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2, and the fall replay are stopped at intervals of within 5 frames on all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. In accordance with the operation order, the reel control is performed so that the promotion replay 1, the promotion replay 2, or the fall replay always wins, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R.

  As described above, different operation modes are set as the operation modes for the replays GR11 to GR16 in order to win the promotion replays 1 and 2 and to avoid the fall replay.

  For this reason, in the normal RT0 in which the replay GRs 11 to 16 are to be subjected to the internal lottery, if any of the replay GRs 11 to 16 is won, the promotion replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and the normal RT0 is maintained. On the other hand, a fall replay wins with a probability of 5/6 and shifts to normal / RT1.

  When the replay GR21 (falling replay + special replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of left, right, middle, and right, a control is performed to align the special replay combination among the winning replays with the payline LN and stop. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the left, middle, and right, a control is performed to align the fall replay combinations with the pay line LN and stop.

  When the replay GR22 (falling replay + special replay + normal replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the left / right middle order, the special replay combination among the winning replays is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the control is performed and a stop operation is performed in an order other than right and left, control is performed to stop the fall replay in combination with the winning line LN.

  When the replay GR23 (falling replay + special replay + lower replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle left / right order, the combination of the special replays among the replayed winnings is aligned and stopped on the pay line LN. When the control is performed and the stop operation is performed in an order other than the middle and left and right, the control is performed so that the fall replay combination is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the replay GR24 (falling replay + special replay + normal replay + lower replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of middle right, left, and left, the special replay combination among the winning replays is aligned with the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in an order other than the center right and left, the control is performed so that the combination of the fall replay is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the replay GR25 (falling replay + special replay + promotion replay 1) is won and a right operation is performed, that is, a stop operation is performed in an operation mode of first stopping the right reel 2R, the special replay of the won replaying roles is performed. Is performed in such a manner as to align and stop the combination with the pay line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the operation mode of pressing left, that is, the first stop of the left reel 2L or the intermediate press, that is, the operation mode of first stopping the middle reel 2C. , A control is performed to stop the fall replay combination in alignment with the pay line LN.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the symbols constituting the special replay and the falling replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, reel control is performed so that special replay or fall replay always wins.

  As described above, different operation modes are set as the operation modes for the replays GR21 to GR25 in order to win the special replay and avoid the fall replay.

  For this reason, in the normal RT0 in which the replay GRs 21 to 25 are to be subjected to the internal lottery, if any of the replay GRs 21 to 25 is won, the special replay wins with a probability of 1/5 and shifts to the normal RT2. On the other hand, a fall replay wins with a probability of 4/5 and shifts to normal / RT1.

  When the replay GR31 (special replay + SP replay + normal replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, and right, the SP replay combination among the replayed players that have been won is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, the control is performed so that the combination of the normal replays of the winning replays is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped. If so, control is performed to stop the special replay combination aligned with the pay line LN.

  When the replay GR32 (special replay + SP replay + normal replay + falling replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the left / right middle order, the SP replay combination among the replayed players selected is aligned with the pay line LN. If a stop operation is performed in the order of left, middle, and right, control is performed to align the combination of normal replays among the replayed winnings in line with the pay line LN, and stop by middle or right push. When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to align the special replay combinations with the payline LN and stop.

  When the replay GR33 (special replay + SP replay + lower replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle left / right order, a control is performed in which the SP replay combination among the replayed players that have been won is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed in the order of center right, left, and left, the control is performed to align the combination of the normal replays of the winning replays with the pay line LN and stop the operation by pressing left or right. If so, control is performed to stop the special replay combination aligned with the pay line LN.

  When the replay GR34 (special replay + SP replay + lower replay + falling replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the middle right / left order, the combination of the SP replays of the replayed players selected is aligned with the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in the middle left and right order, the control of stopping is performed by aligning the combination of the normal replays of the winning replays with the pay line LN, and pressing the left or right button. When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to align the special replay combinations with the payline LN and stop.

  When the replay GR35 (special replay + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, the SP replay combination among the winning replays is aligned with the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left, control is performed to align the combination of the normal replays among the replayed winnings in line with the pay line LN, and stop by pressing the left or the middle. When a stop operation is performed, control is performed to align the special replay combinations with the payline LN and stop.

  When the replay GR36 (special replay + SP replay + normal replay + lower replay + fall replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the order of right, middle, and left, the SP replay combination of the winning replays is awarded to the winning line. When the stop operation is performed in the order of right and left, stop control is performed by aligning the combination of the normal replays of the winning replays with the pay line LN, and then left-pressed. Alternatively, when the stop operation is performed by the middle push, the control is performed to align the special replay combination with the pay line LN and stop.

  As shown in FIG. 3, symbols constituting SP replay, special replay, and normal replay are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all of the left reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, and the right reel 2R. Accordingly, regardless of the stop operation timing of the stop switches 8L to 8R, reel control is performed so that SP replay, special replay, or normal replay always wins.

  As described above, different operation modes are set as the operation modes for winning the SP replay in the replays GR31 to GR36, and further different operation modes for operating the SP replay or the normal replay and avoiding the special replay are set. The mode has been set.

  For this reason, in the normal RT2 in which the replay GRs 31 to 36 are subjected to the internal lottery, if any of the replay GRs 31 to 36 is won, the SP replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and shifts to the normal RT3. On the other hand, a normal replay or a special replay wins with a probability of 5/6, and the normal RT2 is maintained. In addition, when the SP replay wins as described later, one or more navigation stocks that are advantageous to the player are always given. Therefore, if any of the replay GRs 31 to 36 is won in the normal RT2, The SP replay wins with a probability of 1/6, and one or more navi stocks are awarded. In addition, it is possible to make a transition to the normal / RT3 in which the SP replay is easy to win, that is, the navi stock is likely to be awarded.

  In addition, in the normal / RT3 where the replay GRs 31 to 36 are subjected to the internal lottery, if any of the replay GRs 31 to 36 is won, the SP replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and one navi stock described later. On the other hand, the normal replay wins with a probability of 1/6 and the normal RT3 is maintained, and the special replay wins with a probability of 4/6 and shifts to the normal RT2.

  As shown in FIG. 17, when the left bell 1 (downward bell + upper bell 5 + upper bell 8) is elected and a stop operation is performed by pushing left, the combination of the elected small bell among the elected small roles is selected. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle or the right, the upper bell 5, the upper bell 8, or any combination of the transitions is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped. Is performed.

  When the left bell 2 (lower bell + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7) is won and the stop operation is performed by pushing left, the combination of the right hand bells of the winning small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by middle-pressing or right-pressing, control is performed to align any one of the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, and the transition outcome to the pay line LN and stop.

  If the left bell 3 (lower bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 3) is won and the stop operation is performed by pressing left, the combination of the right hand bells of the winning small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by middle-pressing or right-pressing, a control is performed in which one of the combinations of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, and the transition outcome is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the left bell 4 (downward bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4) is won and the stop operation is performed by pushing left, the combination of the right-down bell among the winning small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by middle pressing or right pressing, a control is performed in which any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 4, and the transition outcome is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the constituent symbols of the downward-sloping bell are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the left bells 1 to 4 are won, a stop operation is performed by pressing the left. In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, control is performed so that the downward-sloping bell is always aligned with the winning line LN. On the other hand, the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Even if the left bells 1 to 4 have won, even if the left bells 1 to 4 are won, if the stop operation is performed by middle-pressing or right-hand pushing, the drawing range of the winning upper bells 1 to 8 will be the drawing range. If the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, the won upper bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in that case, the control is performed so that the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When the middle bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 5) is won and a stop operation is performed by middle pressing, a control for stopping the combination of the middle bell among the winning small roles in line with the winning line LN is performed. When a stop operation is performed by pressing the left button or the right button, a control is performed in which any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 5, and the transitional outcome is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the middle bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 6) is won and the stop operation is performed by the middle push, the control to stop the combination of the middle bell among the winning small roles in line with the winning line LN is performed. When a stop operation is performed by pressing left or right, control is performed to align any combination of the upper bell 1, the upper bell 6, or the transitional outcome to the payline LN and stop.

  When the middle bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 7) is won and the stop operation is performed by the middle push, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bell among the winning small roles in line with the pay line LN is performed. When a stop operation is performed by pressing the left button or the right button, a control is performed in which any combination of the upper bell 4, the upper bell 7, and the transition outcome is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the middle bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 8) is won and the stop operation is performed by the middle push, the control of stopping the combination of the middle bell among the winning small roles in line with the winning line LN is performed. When a stop operation is performed by pressing left or right, control is performed so that any combination of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 8, or the transitional outcome is aligned with the payline LN and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the constituent symbols of the middle bell are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the middle bells 1 to 4 are won, when a stop operation is performed by middle pushing. , Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the control to align the middle bell to the winning line LN is always performed, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Even if the middle bells 1 to 4 win, even if the stop operation is performed by pressing left or right, it is appropriate to become the drawing range of the configuration symbols of the winning upper bells 1 to 8 If the stop operation is not performed at the timing, the winning upper row bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in such a case, control is performed so that the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  When the right bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 1 upper bell 7) is won and the stop operation is performed by right-pressing, the control is performed so that the combination of the middle bell among the winning small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by pressing left or middle, a control is performed in which any combination of the upper bell 1, the upper bell 7, or the transitional outcome is aligned with the payline LN and stopped.

  When the right bell 2 (middle bell + upper bell 3 + upper bell 5) is won and the stop operation is performed by right-pressing, the control is performed such that the combination of the middle bell among the winning small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by pressing left or middle, a control is performed in which any combination of the upper bell 3, the upper bell 5, or the transition outcome is aligned with the payline LN and stopped.

  When the right bell 3 (middle bell + upper bell 4 + upper bell 6) is won and the stop operation is performed by right-pressing, the control is performed so that the combination of the middle bell among the winning small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by pressing left or middle, a control is performed in which any combination of the upper bell 4, the upper bell 6, and the transition appearance is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  When the right bell 4 (middle bell + upper bell 2 + upper bell 8) is won and a stop operation is performed by right-pressing, the control is performed so that the combination of the middle bell among the winning small roles is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When a stop operation is performed by pressing left or middle, a control is performed in which any combination of the upper bell 2, the upper bell 8, and the transition outcome is aligned with the payline LN and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the constituent symbols of the middle bell are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when the right bells 1 to 4 are won, a stop operation is performed by right pressing. In the meantime, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the middle bell is always aligned with the pay line LN, while the symbols constituting the upper bells 1 to 8 are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or more on all reels. Even if the right bells 1 to 4 are elected, if the stop operation is performed by pressing left or middle, appropriate pull-in range of the winning upper bells 1 to 8 will be obtained. If the stop operation is not performed at the timing, the winning upper row bell cannot be aligned with the winning line LN, and in such a case, control is performed so that the transition outcome is aligned with the winning line LN.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when any of the left bell, the middle bell, and the right bell, that is, the pressing order bell is won, the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode according to the type of the winning combination. By performing a stop operation in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode corresponding to the type of the winning combination, the upper bell is aligned in 1/4, while the downward-sloping bell or the middle-level bell always wins. In some cases, the upper stage bell is not aligned and the transition rolls are aligned.

  For this reason, at the time of winning of the pushing order bell, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the operation is performed in a specific operation mode according to the type of the winning combination. That is, even if one of the pushing order bells is won, a specific operation mode cannot be intentionally selected unless the type is known. Although the medal can be surely acquired by winning, the medal cannot be reliably acquired at the rate of 2/3 because the upper bell can be won only by 1/4.

  When RB bell 1 (upward bell + upward right ribebe) is won and a stop operation is performed by pressing left, a control to stop the combination of the upright bell among the winning small roles in line with the winning line LN is performed. When a stop operation is performed by middle-press or right-press, control is performed to align the combination of upward-sloping rebebes with the payline LN and stop.

  If RB Bell 2 (Rising Bell + Rising Ribebe + Rising Belly) is won and a stop operation is performed by pressing the middle, the combination of the rising bell of the winning small role is aligned with the winning line LN and stopped. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button, the control of stopping the alignment is performed by aligning the combination of the rising right bevel with the pay line LN. When the stopping operation is performed by pressing the right button, the stop operation is performed. Control is performed so that the combination is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  RB bell 3 (Middle bell + falling bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 2 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + lower watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle cherry +1 sheet role + rising bell + rising bevel + rising ribebe) is won and if the stop operation is performed by pressing right, the combination of the rising right bell among the winning small roles is aligned with the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed by pressing the left button or the middle button, the combination of the upward-sloping bevel is aligned with the pay line LN and stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the constituent symbols of the upward-sloping bell, the upward-sloping rebebe, and the upward-sloping bevel are arranged at intervals of 5 frames or less on all reels, and when RB bells 1 to 4 are won, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, ten medals will be paid out in line with the winning line LN in any combination of the upward-sloping bell, the upward-sloping rebebe, and the upward-sloping bevel, but at a rate of 1/3. Only in this case, the combination of “bell-bell-bell” is aligned to the right.

  Although not particularly shown, when a bell (middle bell + lower right bell) is won, the combination of "bell-bell-bell" is arranged on the payline LN regardless of the reel stop order and operation timing. Is controlled as follows.

  In addition, all the roles (middle bell + right down bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 3 + upper bell 4 + upper bell 5 + upper bell 6 + upper bell 7 + upper bell 8 + middle watermelon + lower right watermelon + upper watermelon + lower cherry + middle In the event that "Cherry + 1 sheet role + rising bell + rising ribbed" is won, the combination of "bell-bell-bell" is controlled to rise to the right regardless of the reel stop order and operation timing. You.

[Game flow]
As shown in FIG. 14, in the present embodiment, the normal game state, one of the inside, one of the inside, RB, and BB (RB) are controlled. In the normal game state, any one of RT0 to RT4 is controlled. Crab is controlled.

  As described above, the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is assigned an area for storing a game state flag capable of specifying a game state and an area for storing an RT flag capable of specifying a type of RT. I have.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the lottery table in which the number of judgment values of the target combination is determined, the lottery table for the inside one, the lottery table for the inside two, the lottery table for the RB, and the lottery table for the BB (RB) It has a lottery table and a lottery table for a normal game state, and further has a lottery table for a normal game state, a lottery table for RT0, a lottery table for RT1, a lottery table for RT2, and a lottery table for RT3. , RT4.

  Then, in the internal lottery process, the game state and the type of the RT are specified with reference to the value of the game state flag and the value of the RT flag stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and a lottery table is selected accordingly, By performing a lottery using the selected lottery table, a lottery is performed with a winning probability according to the gaming state and the type of RT for the lottery target combination corresponding to the gaming state and the type of RT.

  For details, refer to the value of the game state flag stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 to determine whether the current game state is BB (RB), RB, or internal 1; It is determined whether or not the inside is 2 or not, and if the current gaming state is BB (RB), for the BB (RB) in which the target combination of the internal lottery in the BB (RB) and the number of the determination values are stored. RB is selected and a lottery is performed. If the RB is being executed, an RB lottery table in which the target combinations of the internal lottery during the RB and the numbers of the determination values are stored is selected and the lottery is performed. If so, the lottery table for internal junior one in which the target combination of the internal lottery and the number of judgment values thereof are stored is selected and the lottery is performed. Of the target role and the number of judgment values If the current gaming state is neither BB (RB), neither RB, nor 1 or 2 in the inside, that is, if the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, the RAM 41c further stores in the RAM 41c. Referring to the stored value of the RT flag, the lottery is performed by selecting the normal lottery table storing the target combination of the internal lottery and the number of the determination values according to the type of the RT specified from the value. Thus, the lottery of the target combination according to each game state and the type of RT is performed with the winning probability according to each game state and the type of RT.

  Normal / RT0 indicates that when the promotion replay wins in the normal / RT1 (when any of the replays GR1 to GR6 is won and the stop operation is performed in the order in which the promotion replay wins), the normal / RT1 and the normal / RT2 are executed. The process is shifted when the game has been exhausted by the specified number of games. Then, regardless of the number of games after the transition to the normal RT0, the normal RT0 transitions to the normal RT1 due to the winning of the falling replay or the stop of the transition, or the normal RT2 due to the special replay winning. The process ends, or the special role is won and the process moves to the inside 1 or the inside 2 to end.

  Normal / RT1 shifts when normal / RT0, normal / RT2, normal / RT3, normal / RT4 stops rolling, normal / RT0 falls replay, or normal / RT2 wins special replay. I do. In addition, in the normal RT1, the number of remaining RT games is decremented for each game, and the number of remaining RT games becomes 0 after the prescribed number of games (1000G in this embodiment) is consumed. The process ends when the process moves to the normal mode RT0 or when the special role is won and the process moves to the inside middle 1 or the inside middle 2.

  Normal / RT2 shifts when a special replay wins in normal / RT0 or normal / RT3. In the normal RT2, the number of remaining RT games is decremented for each game, and the number of remaining RT games is reduced to 0 by exhausting the prescribed number of games (30G in the present embodiment). Normal or RT0, SP replay wins and moves to normal / RT3, or the transition stops and moves to normal / RT1. Special role is won and inside 1 or inside 2 It ends by moving to.

  Normal / RT3 shifts when SP replay wins in normal / RT2. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to the normal RT3, whether the special replay is won and the transition to the normal RT2 is performed, or the transition is stopped and the transition to the normal RT1 is performed regardless of the number of games since the transition to the normal RT3. Then, the special role is won and the process is shifted to the inside middle 1 or the inside middle 2 to end.

  Normal • RT4 shifts at the end of BB (RB) and RB. Then, regardless of the number of games after the transition to the normal RT4, the transition stop is stopped and the transition to the RT1 is performed, or the special role is won, and the transition is made to the inside middle one or the inside middle two. To finish.

  The inside 1 shifts when BB among the special combinations is won in the normal gaming state. Then, the inside middle 1 ends when the special role that triggered the shift to the inside middle 1 wins and shifts to BB (RB) or RB, regardless of the number of games since the shift to the inside middle. .

  The inside 2 shifts when the RB among the special combinations is won in the normal gaming state. Then, the second of the inside ends when the special role that triggered the shift to the second inside wins and shifts to BB (RB) or RB, regardless of the number of games since the shift to the inside. .

  The RB shifts when the RB wins in the inside 1 or 2. Then, the RB ends when the 12 games are completed or when the prize is won six times.

  BB (RB) shifts when BB wins inside. Then, the BB (RB) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the BB (RB) exceeds the specified number, regardless of the number of games since the transition to the BB (RB).

  Further, the slot machine according to the present embodiment can execute a navigation effect of notifying, by the sub-control unit 91, information that can specify a pressing order for winning the navigation target role when the navigation target role is won. The effect state can be controlled during an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as AT) serving as a notification period.

  Here, the transition state of the gaming state and the RT according to the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, when the RB or BB (RB) ends, the routine shifts to the normal RT4.

  In normal / RT4, when the transition roll stops, the process moves to RT1, and when the special role is won, the process moves to the inside middle 1 or the inside middle 2 depending on the type of the won special role.

  Normally, if any one of the left bell 1-4, the middle bell 1-4, and the right bell 1-4 is won in RT4 and the small role cannot be won, the transition roll will be stopped. Therefore, any of the left bells 1-4, the middle bells 1-4, and the right bells 1-4 can be won in the normal / RT4 shifted after the end of the RB or BB (RB), and the small role can be won. If not, the routine shifts to normal / RT1.

  In the normal RT1, no special role is won and the promotion replay does not win, either, the specified number of games (1000G) is consumed, or the promotion replay wins, and the transition to the normal RT0 is made, and the special role is won. Then, depending on the type of the special role that has been won, the process moves to the inside middle one or the inside middle two.

  In the normal RT1, the replay GR1 to 6 are won and the stop order is correct, so that the promotion replay wins. Therefore, in the normal RT1, the replay GR1 to 6 is won and the stop order is correct, the normal The process moves to RT0.

  In the case of normal RT0, the fall replay wins or the transition stop stops, and the game shifts to the normal RT1. When the special replay wins, the game shifts to the normal RT2 and the special role is won. Depending on the type of the special role that has been performed, the state shifts to inner middle 1 or inner middle 2.

  Normally, at RT0, the replays GR11 to GR16 win, and if the stop order is correct, the promotion replay wins. If the answer is incorrect, the fall replay wins. Also, in the normal RT0, the replays GR21 to GR25 are won, and if the stop order is correct, the special replay is won. If the answer is incorrect, the falling replay is won. In addition, when one of the left bells 1-4, the middle bells 1-4, and the right bells 1-4 is elected in the normal RT0 and the small combination cannot be won, the transition appearance stops. For this reason, in the normal RT0, the replay GRs 21 to 25 are won and the stop order is correct, and the process proceeds to the normal RT2. The replay GRs 11 to 16 are won and the stop order is incorrect or the left bell 1 -4, the middle bell 1-4, and the right bell 1-4 are won, and if it is not possible to win the small role, the routine shifts to normal / RT1.

  In normal RT2, no special role is won, SP replay does not win, and the game proceeds to normal RT0 by completing the specified number of games (30G), and SP replay wins, moves to normal RT3, When the special role is won, the process moves to the inside 1 or the inside 2 depending on the type of the special role that has been won.

  In the normal RT2, the replays GR31 to GR36 are won, and when the stop order is correct, the SP replay wins. In addition, when one of the left bell 1-4, the middle bell 1-4, and the right bell 1-4 is won in the normal RT2 and the small combination cannot be won, the transition appearance stops. For this reason, in the normal RT2, the replay GRs 31 to 36 are won, and when the stop order is correct, the process shifts to the normal RT3, and any one of the left bells 1-4, the middle bells 1-4, and the right bells 1-4 is performed. Is won, and if the small combination cannot be won, the routine shifts to normal / RT1.

  In the case of normal RT3, the special replay wins the game and the transition to RT2 is made. When the result of the transition is stopped, the game moves to the normal RT1 and the special role is won. Move to Medium 1 or Internal Medium 2.

  In the normal RT3, the replays GR31 to GR36 win, and if the stop order is correct, the SP replay or the normal replay wins. If the answer is incorrect, the special replay wins. In addition, when one of the left bells 1-4, the middle bells 1-4, and the right bells 1-4 is won in the normal RT3, and the small combination cannot be won, the transition roll stops. For this reason, in the normal RT3, the replay GRs 31 to 36 are won, and the stop order is incorrect, so that the process shifts to the normal RT2, and the left bells 1-4, the middle bells 1-4, and the right bells 1-4 are displayed. If one of the winners is won and the small role cannot be won, the routine shifts to normal / RT1.

  In the inside 1 and 2, the special role, which has triggered the shift to the inside, is transferred to RB or BB (RB) by winning.

[About production control of sub control unit]
Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  When receiving a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt processing, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in a reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be stored.

  In the timer interrupt processing (sub), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the step, and the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like are controlled based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. Controls the output of various effect devices.

  In the control pattern table, for each of a plurality of types of effect patterns, a display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, a lighting mode of the effect LED 52, an output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, a lighting mode of the reel LED, and the like. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and upon receiving the command, the sub-control unit 91 sets the control pattern of the control pattern registered in the control pattern table corresponding to the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c in the game. The control device refers to the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command, and controls the output of the effect device based on the control pattern. As a result, an effect according to the effect pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  Note that, when a new command is received during the execution of the effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and returns to the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. In other words, when a new command is received even in a state where the production has not been completed to the end, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new production is performed unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command will be executed.

  The effect pattern is selected at the selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the winning number command when the winning number command is received, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning number command, the sub-control unit 91 stores the effect in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the winning number command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of a plurality of effect patterns is selected from the plurality of effect patterns in accordance with the selected rate, and the selected effect pattern is set as the effect pattern of the game in the RAM 91c. Also, even if the same command is received, different control patterns are selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the winning number command is received, and as a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  Next, various control contents executed by the sub control unit 91 in the present embodiment will be described below.

[Startup process (sub)]
First, the control content of the start-up process (sub) executed by sub-control unit 91 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18, when a system reset signal is input from the reset circuit 95, the sub control unit 91 performs a start-up process (sub).

  First, the sub-control unit 91 initializes a built-in device, a peripheral IC, an interrupt mode, a stack pointer, and the like (Sn1), and then permits access to the RAM 91c (Sn2). Next, the power interruption recovery command 1, the power interruption recovery command 2, the power interruption recovery command 3, the power interruption recovery command 4, and the hot start command generated in Sa12 to Sa16 of the startup processing (main) of FIGS. It is determined whether or not it has been received from the control unit 41 (Sn3). If these commands have not been received, it is determined whether or not the setting change start command generated in Sa16 of the startup processing (main) in FIGS. 5 and 6 has been received from the main control unit 41 (Sn4). . When the setting change start command is received, a setting change start command flag indicating that the setting change start command has been received is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c (Sn5).

  When the power interruption recovery command 1, the power interruption recovery command 2, the power interruption recovery command 3, the power interruption recovery command 4, the hot start command, and the setting change start command are received, whether the RAM 91c has backup data. It is determined whether or not. Whether or not there is backup data in the RAM 91c is confirmed by, for example, whether or not there is a backup flag set in the RAM 91c in a power interruption process described later (Sn6). If the backup flag has not been set in the step of Sn6, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sn13). On the other hand, if it is determined in Sn6 that the backup flag is set, the data in the RAM is normal and the backup flag is cleared (Sn7).

  If the backup flag is cleared in the step of Sn7, the RAM parity of all the storage areas of the RAM 91c is calculated (Sn8). In the step of Sn9, it is determined whether or not the RAM parity calculated in the step of Sn8 is 0. If the RAM parity is not 0 in the step of Sn9, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sn13).

  If the RAM parity is 0 in the step of Sn9, it is determined whether or not the setting change command reception flag is stored in the RAM 91c (Sn10).

  If the setting change start command reception flag is stored in the RAM 91c, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sn13). If the setting change start command reception flag is not stored in the RAM 91c, a return process is executed based on the backed up data (Sn11). Then, the sub control unit 91 described with reference to FIG. 33 permits the interruption of the timer interruption processing (sub) executed at regular intervals (interval of 1.12 ms), and executes the timer interruption processing according to the timer interruption. I do. If it is determined in step Sn4 that the setting change start command has not been received, it is determined whether the error start command generated in Sa22 of the startup processing (main) in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is (Sn14). If it is determined that an error start command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sn15, where the RAM 91c is initialized, and error processing is performed (Sn16). In the error processing, an error notification is made. For example, when the reset / setting switch 38 is operated by a game clerk to release the error state, the error notification ends and the state returns to the original state. When it is determined that the error start command has not been received, that is, when the setting change start command, the return command, and the error start command have not been received, the RAM 91c is initialized (Sn13). Then, the sub-control unit 91 described with reference to FIG. 19 permits the interruption of the timer interruption process (sub) executed at regular intervals (interval of 1.12 ms), and executes the timer interruption process according to the timer interruption. I do.

[Timer interrupt processing (sub)]
Next, a timer interrupt process (sub) executed by the sub control unit 91 (CPU 91c) at intervals of 1.12 seconds based on the count value of the internal clock will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the timer interrupt processing (sub), the sub control unit 91 first saves the register in use to the stack area (Sp1). Next, a power failure determination process is performed (Sp2). In the power failure determination process, it is determined whether or not a voltage drop signal has been input from the power interruption detection circuit 48. If the voltage drop signal has been input, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal has been input in the previous power failure determination process. If a voltage drop signal is also input in the previous power failure determination process, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and a power interruption flag indicating that fact is set.

  After the power failure determination process in step Sp2, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (Sp3). If the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to the power failure process (sub). In the power interruption process (sub), the backup flag used in the determination of Sn6 in the startup process (sub) shown in FIG. 14 is set after the backup data is created, or used in the determination of Sn9 in the startup process (sub) shown in FIG. Processing such as calculating the checksum by calculating the exclusive OR of the backup data is executed.

  If the power interruption flag is not set, a command analysis process is executed (Sp4). In the command analysis processing, it is determined whether or not a command is stored in the command buffer. If the command is stored in the command buffer, the command is acquired from the command buffer. Then, a process corresponding to the acquired command is executed.

  Next, in the AT (assist time) at which the navigation effect is executed when the navigation target combination is won, the sub-control unit 91 determines the number of medals given to the player by paying out medals from the number of medals used by the player in the game. A net increment counting process for counting the net increment after subtracting the number is executed (Sp5). In the navigation effect, the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is notified.

  Next, the sub-control unit 91 performs a notification effect for notifying that the number of medals obtained by the player when the payout of medals has occurred during the AT or that the net increase in the AT has reached the specified number. An execution process is executed (Sp6).

  In addition to the above, when the AT (assist time) lottery condition is satisfied (when the player wins a cherry (weak cherry, strong cherry, middle cherry) or SP replay, which is a lottery target in the internal lottery). Execute the AT lottery. In the AT lottery, it is determined whether or not the navigation stock number is to be given. When it is determined that the navigation stock is to be provided, it is also determined how much the navigation stock is to be provided. The number of navigation stocks indicates a period during which control by the AT is possible.

  In addition, in ART (AT in RT0, RT2, RT3), the winning probability of the navigation target combination is set such that the average net increase of medals per game is 2 by executing the navigation effect. Therefore, in ART, the expected value of the number of medals given to the player with respect to the number of medals used by the player becomes 2 or more, and the number of medals given to the player can be larger. On the other hand, in the case of RT1 or RT4 in a state not controlled by the AT, that is, in the normal game state, the navigation effect is not executed, so that the winning probability of the winning combination is reduced so that the average net number of medals per game is less than 0. Is set. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the expected value of the number of medals given to the player with respect to the number of medals used by the player is less than 0, and the number of medals used by the player may be larger. In the following, ART may be simply referred to as AT.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the AT is completed (after the end of the AT when the navi stock becomes 0), the winning probability of the AT lottery is higher than when the AT lottery is performed at another opportunity until 50 games have elapsed. (I.e., the probability of providing the navigation stock) is set to a high probability. Therefore, until the end of the AT, up to the 50th game, the area is an AT withdrawal zone, and it is expected that the AT will be extended by AT withdrawal. It is not necessary to change the winning probability of the AT lottery as in the present embodiment, and even when the change is made, the timing and the period can be appropriately set.

  When one or more navi-stock numbers are determined in the AT lottery, the sub-control unit 91 stores an AT flag and an AT flag indicating the navi-stock number in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. The sub-control unit 91 specifies whether or not to control the AT based on the AT flag in the RAM 91c, and specifies the remaining navigation stock number. When the AT flag indicating that it is an AT is set, the number of navigation stocks is consumed by one, and the AT can be controlled.

  When the number of navigation stocks is acquired while the AT flag indicating AT is set, the number of navigation stocks acquired this time is added to the number of navigation stocks specified by the AT flag.

  For example, if an AT lottery is performed while the AT flag indicating that the AT is set is updated to an AT flag according to the result of the AT lottery. Updating to the AT flag according to the result of the AT lottery means, for example, adding the number of navigation stocks according to the result of the current AT lottery to the number of navigation stocks specified from the AT lag stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c. May be rewritten to an AT flag that specifies the number of navigation stocks, or any method that allows the current AT flag to be specified according to the result of the AT lottery.

  The sub-control unit 91 manages the control on the AT based on the AT flag set according to the result of the AT lottery when the normal time is RT1 to RT4.

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT when it is specified from the AT flag in the normal RT1 that the AT is the AT. That is, when the navigation stock remains, the control of the AT is started. During the period from normal-RT1 to normal-RT0, the navigation effect can be executed under the control of the AT without consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks.

  When the control is performed by the AT and the control is performed from the normal RT1 to the normal RT0, the start condition for the AT by consuming (subtracting) the number of navi stocks by 1 is satisfied, and 50 games are consumed. Until that time, control is performed to the ART that is the RT and the AT that has a high probability of winning the re-gaming combination. When the navigation stock number is consumed by 1, the AT flag indicating the navigation stock number obtained by subtracting 1 is updated.

  In addition, the sub control unit 91 performs non-AT control when the number of remaining games becomes 0 when the game is ART. At this time, if the navigation stock number indicated by the AT flag is 0, it is updated to an AT flag indicating that it is not an AT. That is, the end condition of a series of ATs is satisfied when the AT flag at the time of controlling from the AT to the non-AT is the navi stock number 0.

  When it is specified from the AT flag at the time of control to the non-AT that it is not the AT, the AT is not controlled again, and the navigation effect is not executed. As a result, when it is normal / RT0 or normal / RT2, the possibility that the transition outcomes are aligned is increased, and the possibility of being controlled to normal / RT1 is increased.

  On the other hand, if the navigation stock number specified by the AT flag at the time of the non-AT control is 1 or more, the navigation stock number is consumed by 1 and the control is continued to the 50 game AT. Then, the number of navigation stocks becomes zero, and the number of navigations becomes zero, whereby the AT ends.

  When it is specified from the AT flag that the AT is an AT, the sub-control unit 91 executes the navigation effect by winning the navigation target combination corresponding to the gaming state. The navigation target combination corresponding to the game state is the replay GR1 to 6 when the game is normal / RT1, the replay GR11 to 16 and the replay GR21 to 25 when the game is normal / RT0, and the replay GR31 when the game is normal / RT2. ~ 36. In addition, in normal RT0 to RT3, the pressing order bell is a common navigation target combination.

  The sub-control unit 91 sets an AT flag when an AT lottery is won, and executes an AT control process (not shown) when it is normal RT1 to RT4 to control the AT.

  Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT when it is specified from the AT flag in the normal RT4 or the normal RT1 that the AT is AT. During the period from the transition from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, the AT is controlled without counting the number of games in the AT, and the navigation effect can be executed.

  When the vehicle is controlled by the AT, and when the vehicle is controlled from normal / RT1 to normal / RT0, a start condition for ART (assist replay time) is satisfied. Then, during the predetermined number of games (50 games in the present embodiment), the AT is controlled to AT (that is, ART) in the normal / RT0, RT2, and RT3 in which the winning probability of the replay is high. The sub-control unit 91 clears the AT flag and performs non-AT control when the remaining game number becomes 0 during ART.

  When controlled by the non-AT, the navigation effect is not executed. As a result, in the case of normal-RT0, normal-RT2, or normal-RT3, there is a high possibility that the transition rolls will be aligned, and the possibility of being controlled to normal-RT1 will increase.

  In the AT control process, when it is specified from the AT flag that AT is the AT, the sub-control unit 91 executes the navigation effect by winning the navigation target combination according to the gaming state. The navigation target combination according to the game state is the replay GR1 to 6 when the normal is RT1, the replay GR11 to 16 and the replay GR21 to 25 when the normal is RT0, and is the normal or RT2 or the normal and RT3. At some point, it is the replay GR31-36. In addition, in normal RT0 to RT3, the pressing order bell is a common navigation target combination.

  As the navigator effect when the replays GR1 to GR6 are won, the pressing order for winning the promotion replay is notified according to the winning situation. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the replay GR1 is won. In addition, as the navigation effect when the player wins the replay GR2, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR3 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR4 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as the navigation effect when the replay GR5 is won, a message such as “Right and left middle!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR6 is won, a message such as “Right, Middle, Left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As the navigation effect when the replays GR11 to GR16 are won, a pressing order for winning the promotion replay is notified according to the winning situation. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as the navigation effect when the replay GR11 is won. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR12 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR13 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR14 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR15 is won, a message such as “Right and left middle!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR16 is won, a message such as “Right middle left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As the navigation effect when the replays GR21 to GR25 are won, a pressing order for winning a special replay is notified according to a winning situation. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the replay GR 21 is won. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR22 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. As the navigation effect when the replay GR23 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR24 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, a message such as “Right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a navigation effect when the replay GR 25 is won.

  As a navigation effect (excluding RT3) when the replays GR31 to GR36 are won, a pressing order for winning the SP replay is notified according to the winning situation. For example, a message such as “left middle right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as the navigation effect when the replay GR31 is won. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR 32 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as the navigation effect when the replay GR 33 is won, a message such as “middle left and right!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR34 is won, a message such as “middle right left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Further, as the navigation effect when the replay GR 35 is won, a message such as “Right and left middle!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, as the navigation effect when the replay GR 36 is won, a message such as “Right middle left!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  In addition, as a navigation effect when one of the pushing order bells is won, a pushing order for surely winning the downward-sloping bell or the middle bell is notified. For example, when the left bell is won, since the left reel is stopped as the first stop reel, the downward-sloping bell can be reliably won, so that "left!" For stopping the left reel as the first stop reel is used. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, when the middle bell is won, the middle reel is stopped as the first stop reel so that the middle bell can be reliably won, so that "middle!" For stopping the middle reel as the first stop reel is displayed. The message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, when the right bell is won, the middle reel can be reliably won by stopping the right reel as the first stop reel. Therefore, "Right!" For stopping the right reel as the first stop reel is used. The message is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As described above, in the navigation effect according to the present embodiment, a message reminding an operation mode that is advantageous to the player is notified in the same mode regardless of the type of the navigation target combination. For this reason, the player can operate in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player without being aware of the type of the winning navigation target combination.

  It should be noted that the mode of the navigation effect is not limited to such a mode, and may be any mode as long as the player can distinguish it according to the winning situation. The navigation effect is not limited to the one displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and may be executed using the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like.

  By executing the navigation effect, it is possible to win a promotion replay winning, a special replay winning, an SP replay winning, a bell winning, and a fall replay winning intentionally won.

[Net increase count processing]
Next, the net increment counting process (Sp5) executed in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the net increment counting process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT flag is set (Sc1). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is being performed. If the AT flag has not been set, the process ends. If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not a bet amount has been set by determining whether or not a medal insertion command from the main control unit 41 has been received (Sc2). If the bet amount has not been set, the process proceeds to Sc3. When the number of bets is set, the number of medals (three in the present embodiment) corresponding to the number of bets is subtracted from the net increase counter that counts the net increase (Sc3). In Sc4, it is determined whether or not a payout of medals has occurred based on the winning number command from the main control unit 41 (Sc4). If no medals have been paid out, the process ends. When the payout of medals has occurred, the payout number of medals is added to the net increase counter, and the process is terminated (Sc5).

[Notification effect execution processing]
Next, the notification effect execution process (Sp6) executed in the timer interrupt process (sub) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the notification effect execution processing, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a medal payout has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41. It is determined (Sq1). If no medals have been paid out, the process ends. When a medal is paid out, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sq2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is being performed. If the AT flag has not been set, the process ends. When the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not the net increment counted by the net increment counter in the net increment counting process of FIG. 20 has reached a specified number (in the present embodiment, whether or not the specified number has been exceeded) ) Is determined (Sq3). In the present embodiment, the prescribed number is set to 1000, 2500, 5000, and 10000 sheets.

  When the net addition number reaches the specified number, the specified number reaching display indicating that the net addition number has reached the specified number is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 (Sq4). The specified number reaching display can be displayed in various modes, for example, the display of the number of acquired sheets by characters (such as "1000 sheets OVER!"), The display by a graph, the display by the type and color of the character, and the like. After the display of the specified number is performed, the process is terminated.

  If the net increase has not reached the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the acquired number indicating that the medals have been paid out (that is, the player has acquired the medals) (Sq5). The display of the acquired number can be displayed in various modes, for example, a display of the acquired number by characters (such as “8 GET!”), A display by a graph, a display by the type and color of the character, and the like. After displaying the acquired number, the process is terminated.

[Specific Example of First Embodiment]
Next, a specific example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 22, the rotation state of the reels and the display contents of the liquid crystal display 51 at that time are arranged. The arrow in the display window 3 indicates that the reel is rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, it is assumed that the game of the AT is started in a state where the net increase number in the AT is 0, and the middle bell is won. At this time, from the liquid crystal display 51, “TOTAL 0” is displayed at the top of the screen as the net increase display 300 in AT. In addition, “Bell!” Is displayed at the center of the screen as a winning combination display 301 indicating the winning combination won by the internal lottery. Also, a pressing order display 302 is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The pressing order display 302 indicates that the stop switches are operated in the order indicated by the numerals. Note that, in the drawing, the order of center → right → left is shown as the push order display 302.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell wins, the net number increase display 300 changes to “8”. Also, “8 GET !!” is displayed as the acquired number display 303 (see Sq5 in FIG. 21).

  As shown in FIG. 22 (b), it is assumed that the game of AT is started in a state where the net increase number in AT is 999, and the middle bell is won. At this time, “TOTAL999” is displayed as the net increase display 300 in the AT. “Bell!” Is displayed as the winning combination display 301. Further, a pressing order display 302 is displayed.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell wins, the net number increase display 300 becomes “1007”. Also, “1000 sheets OVER !!” is displayed as the specified number reaching display 304 (see Sq4 in FIG. 21).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, it is notified that the payout has occurred, and when the net increase reaches the specified number when the payout occurs, the net increase is performed without notifying that the payout has occurred. That the number has reached the specified number. Accordingly, the player can simultaneously recognize that the payout has occurred in addition to the fact that the net increase has reached the prescribed number. In addition, by efficiently notifying only that the net addition number has reached the specified number, it is possible to further impress that the net addition number has reached the specified number.

  Further, in the first embodiment, it is set that a medal is paid out as the first event, and it is set that the net increase reaches the specified number as the second event. Therefore, it is possible to further impress the player to reach the prescribed number of the net increase regarding the payout of medals which is advantageous to the player.

  In the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase number has reached the specified number. Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the prescribed number.

  In the first embodiment, only the display of reaching the specified number is performed by the liquid crystal display device 51 when the net addition number reaches the specified number. However, it is assumed that the payout of medals is generated by another device such as the speakers 53 and 54. The notification may be issued separately from the prescribed notification display. That is, when the second event occurs, the occurrence of the first event need not be notified by the same means.

[About the second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. The detailed description of the portions described in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from the first embodiment will be described in detail.

[Notification effect execution processing]
In the second embodiment, a notification effect execution process different from that in FIG. 21 is executed in a timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the notification effect execution process according to the second embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41, and thereby pays out medals. It is determined whether or not it has occurred (Ss1). If no medals have been paid out, the process ends. If a medal is paid out, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Ss2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is being performed. If the AT flag has not been set, the process ends. When the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not the net increment counted by the net increment counter in the net increment counting process of FIG. 20 has reached a specified number (in the present embodiment, whether or not the specified number has been exceeded) ) Is determined (Ss3). In the present embodiment, the prescribed number is set to 1000, 2500, 5000, and 10000 sheets.

  When the net addition number reaches the specified number, a medal acquisition sound indicating that the medal has been paid out (that is, the player has obtained the medal) is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the net addition number is specified. The specified number reaching display indicating that the number has been reached is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 (Sq4). The medal acquisition sound can be in various modes such as a message output (“medal GET!”) Or a unique sound effect. In addition, the specified number reaching display can be displayed in various modes, for example, a display of the acquired number of characters (eg, “1000 sheets OVER!”), A display of a graph, a display of a character type or a color, and the like. After outputting the medal acquisition sound and displaying the reaching of the specified number, the process ends.

  If the net increase has not reached the prescribed number, the loudspeakers 53 and 54 output a medal acquisition sound in the same manner as in Ss4, and the fact that medals have been paid out (that is, the player has won medals). The acquired number is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 (Sq5). The display of the acquired number can be displayed in various modes, for example, a display of the acquired number by characters (such as “8 GET!”), A display by a graph, a display by the type and color of the character, and the like. After the medal acquisition sound is output and the number of acquired medals is displayed, the process ends.

[Specific Example of Second Embodiment]
Next, a specific example of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 24, the rotation state of the reels and the display contents of the liquid crystal display 51 at that time are arranged. The arrow in the display window 3 indicates that the reel is rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, it is assumed that the game of the AT is started in a state where the net increase in number of the AT is 0 and the middle bell is won. At this time, from the liquid crystal display 51, “TOTAL 0” is displayed at the top of the screen as the net increase display 400 in AT. In addition, “Bell!” Is displayed in the center of the screen as a winning combination display 401 indicating the winning combination won by the internal lottery. Also, a pressing order display 302 is displayed at the bottom of the screen. The pressing order display 402 indicates that the stop switches are operated in the order indicated by the numerals. In the drawing, the order of the center → right → left is shown as the pressing order display 402.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell wins, the net number increase display 400 changes to “8”. Further, “8 GET !!” is output as a medal acquisition sound from the speakers 53 and 54 (see Ss5 in FIG. 23). Further, "8 GET !!" is displayed as the acquired number display 403 (see Ss5 in FIG. 23).

  As shown in FIG. 24 (b), it is assumed that the game of the AT is started in a state where the net increase number in the AT is 999 and the middle bell is won. At this time, “TOTAL999” is displayed as the net increase display 400 in the AT. “Bell!” Is displayed as the winning combination display 401. Further, a pressing order display 402 is displayed.

  When the stop switch is operated and the middle bell wins, the net number increase display 400 changes to “1007”. Also, “8 GET !!” is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as a medal acquisition sound (see Ss4 in FIG. 23). Also, “1000 sheets OVER !!” is displayed as the specified number reaching display 404 (see Ss4 in FIG. 23).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net increase does not reach the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred, and the payout is performed. When the net increase has reached the specified number after the occurrence, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase has reached the specified number and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred. Therefore, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing other notifications.

  In the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase has reached the specified number. Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the prescribed number.

  In the second embodiment, it is set that a medal is paid out as the first event, and the second event is set that the net increase reaches the specified number. Therefore, even when different events relating to the payout of medals that are advantageous to the player are reported to have occurred, it is possible to report at the same timing without disturbing one notification.

[About the third embodiment]
Next, a third embodiment will be described. The detailed description of the portions described in the first embodiment will be omitted, and portions different from the first embodiment will be described in detail.

[AT game number added lottery process]
In the third embodiment, an AT game number addition lottery for determining whether to add the AT game number is executed in the timer interrupt processing (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the number-of-AT-games lottery process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a reel acceleration information command has been received from the main control unit 41, thereby ending the game. When the game has started, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sj2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is being performed. If the AT flag has not been set, the process ends. If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not an additional condition is satisfied (Sj3). The additional condition is, for example, a case where the winning combination is won by an internal lottery. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the additional condition is satisfied by determining whether or not any winning combination has been won based on the winning number command from the main control unit 41. If the additional condition is not satisfied, the process ends.

  If the additional condition is satisfied, an additional lottery is executed (Sj4). The additional lottery is executed with a probability according to the type of the winning combination that has been won in the internal lottery. When the additional lottery is completed, the number of additional games determined in the additional lottery is set in the AT game number counter (Sj5). Next, an additional effect flag indicating that an additional effect is to be executed is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the process ends (Sj6). The number of added games is also stored in the RAM 91c so that the number of added games determined by the additional lottery can be identified. The number of additional games is selected from a plurality of types of games, but at least 10 games are added.

[Notification effect execution processing]
In the third embodiment, a notification effect execution process different from that in FIG. 21 is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the notification effect execution process according to the third embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the T flag is set (St1). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is being performed. If the AT flag has not been set, the process ends. If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not a payout of medals has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41 (St2).

  When a medal is paid out, the number of games in the AT (hereinafter, sometimes abbreviated as the number of AT games) is added based on whether or not the additional effect flag is set in Sj6 of FIG. It is determined whether or not it has been (St3).

  When the number of AT games has been added, a medal acquisition sound indicating that a medal has been obtained is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and an additional display of the number of AT games indicating that the number of AT games has been added is displayed on a liquid crystal display. This is performed at 51 (St4). The medal acquisition sound can be in various modes such as a message output (“medal GET!”) Or a unique sound effect. The additional display of the number of AT games can be displayed in various forms such as, for example, the display of the number of acquired games by characters (such as “10 additional games!”), The display by graph, the display by character type and color, and the like. After the output of the medal acquisition sound and the additional display of the number of AT games are performed, the additional effect flag is cleared, and the process ends.

  If it is determined that the additional production flag is not set and the number of AT games is not added, a medal acquisition sound indicating that the medal has been paid out (that is, the player has acquired the medal) is generated. In addition to the output from the speakers 53 and 54, the acquired number display indicating that the medal has been paid out (that is, the player has acquired the medal) is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 (St5). The display of the acquired number can be displayed in various modes, for example, a display of the acquired number by characters (such as “8 GET!”), A display by a graph, a display by the type and color of the character, and the like. After the medal acquisition sound is output and the number of acquired coins is displayed, the additional effect flag is cleared, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout of medals has not occurred in St2, it is determined whether or not the number of AT games has been added based on whether or not the additional effect flag has been set in Sj6 of FIG. (St6). If the additional effect flag has not been set and the number of AT games has not been added, the process ends.

  When the number of AT games has been added, an AT game number added sound indicating that the number of AT games has been added is output from the speakers 53 and 54, and the number of AT games added that indicates that the number of AT games has been added. The display is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 (St7). The additional sound of the number of AT games can be in various forms such as a message output ("10 additional games!") And a unique sound effect. After the output of the additional number of AT games and the display of the additional number of AT games are performed, the additional effect flag is cleared, and the process ends.

[Specific Example of Third Embodiment]
Next, a specific example of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 27, the rotation state of the reels and the display contents of the liquid crystal display 51 at that time are arranged. The arrow in the display window 3 indicates that the reel is rotating.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, when the middle bell wins during the AT, “8 GET !!” is displayed as the acquired number display 500 (see St5 in FIG. 26). Also, “8 GET !!” is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as a medal acquisition sound (see St5 in FIG. 26).

  As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the player wins the normal replay during the AT and wins the additional lottery, "10 additional games !!" is displayed as the additional number of AT games display 501 (see St7 in FIG. 26). In addition, “10 additional games !!” is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as the additional sound of the number of AT games (see St7 in FIG. 26).

  As shown in FIG. 27 (c), if a bell (one of a left bell, a middle bell, and a right bell) is won during the AT and the additional lottery is won, the number of AT games added display 501 is "10 games added !!" Is displayed (see St4 in FIG. 26). Also, “8 GET !!” is output from the speakers 53 and 54 as a medal acquisition sound (see St4 in FIG. 26).

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the payout occurs and the number of AT games is not added, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred, and the payout does not occur. When the number of AT games is added, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the number of AT games has been added, and when a payout occurs and the number of AT games is added, the liquid crystal display 51 is displayed. To notify that the number of AT games has been added, and to notify that the payout has occurred by the speakers 53 and 54. Therefore, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing other notifications.

  In the third embodiment, at least 10 games are added, so that the number of medals obtained by adding the number of AT games is larger than the number of medals obtained by one winning. Therefore, notification of the number of additional games has a higher priority of notification. Then, the liquid crystal display 51 informs the player of the addition of the number of AT games which has a higher priority of the notification to the player than the occurrence of the payout. Therefore, the number of AT games can be further impressed to be added.

[Modification 1]
Next, a first modification of the first to third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first modification, a notification effect indicating that the net increase has exceeded the prescribed number is executed. Also, after the AT ends, the net increase is counted until 50 games are consumed. If the AT is controlled again by the AT before the 50 games are exhausted and the net increase reaches the specified number, the notification effect is not executed for the specified number already targeted for the notification effect. Further, when the notification effect and the continuous effect indicating whether or not the AT continues, the execution of the notification effect is restricted. Then, when the payout of the medal is performed again, the notification effect is executed.

  Then, the specified number reaching display of FIG. 21 in the first embodiment and the specified number reaching display of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment can be implemented as the notification effect in the first modification. Further, in the third embodiment, in addition to the notification effect execution process of FIG. 26, it is possible to further implement the first modification. Hereinafter, a specific process of Modification Example 1 will be described, but a detailed description of portions similar to those of the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

[Notification effect execution processing]
Next, the notification effect execution process in the first modification will be described. The notification effect execution process in the first modification is executed in a timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 28, in the notification effect execution processing, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a medal payout has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41. It is determined (Sh1). If no medals have been paid out, the process ends. If a medal has been paid out, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sh2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is being performed. If the AT flag has not been set, the process ends. When the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not the net increment counted by the net increment counter in the net increment counting process of FIG. 20 has reached a specified number (in the present embodiment, whether or not the specified number has been exceeded) ) Is determined (Sh3). If the net increase has not reached the specified number, the process is terminated.

  When the net increase has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the notified flag corresponding to the reached specified number is set (Sh4). That is, it is determined whether or not a notification effect for notifying that the net increase number has reached the specified number has already been executed with respect to the reached specified number. If the notification effect for the specified number of reaches has already been executed and the notification completion flag is set, the process ends.

  If the notification effect for the specified number of reaches has not been executed yet and the notification completion flag has not been set, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect executed in Sg4 of FIG. 29 is being executed (Sh5). If the continuous effect is being executed, the process ends. If the continuous effect is not being executed, an informing effect for notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number is executed (Sh6). The notification effect is executed by displaying a message or a character indicating that from the liquid crystal display 51. When the notification effect is executed, a notification completion flag corresponding to the notified specified number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the process ends (Sh7). Further, at this time, a specified number to be used for comparison with the next net increase is selected, and the selected specified number is stored and set.

  The net increase is cleared when the number of games after the end of the AT reaches 50 games. Then, for example, while the AT is completed and the net increase is decreased, the net increase is less than the specified number, but the AT is controlled again by the AT before the number of games after the AT reaches 50 games, and the net increase is again the specified number. When the net increase number reaches the specified number again before the net increase number is cleared, such as when the number reaches the specified number, the notification effect is performed again for the specified number once the notification effect has been performed by performing the Sh4 determination. Regulate what is done. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from being impressed that the number of medals has decreased after the completion of the AT.

  In addition, when the execution of the continuous production and the execution of the notification production overlap, the continuous production is performed without performing the notification production by performing the determination of Sh5, and the notification production is paid out again and the net increase is defined. Since it is executed when the number reaches the number, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow of the notification effect being executed when the medal is paid out does not collapse, so the player may feel uncomfortable. The game can proceed as if it were not. The overlap between the execution of the continuous production and the execution of the notification production means that the execution timings of both productions are overlapped in the same game, and both the case where the execution period partially overlaps and the case where the whole execution period overlaps are used. Including.

[Continuous production execution process]
Next, a description will be given of a continuous effect execution process according to the first modification. The continuous effect execution process in the first modification is executed in a timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the continuous effect execution processing, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the game has started by determining whether or not a reel acceleration information command has been received from the main control unit 41. (Sg1). If the game has not started, the process ends. When the game has started, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sg2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is being performed. If the AT flag has not been set, the process ends. If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not the number of games until the end of the AT is within 5 games (Sg3). If the number of games until the end of the AT is within five games, the continuation to notify whether or not the AT is continued (that is, whether or not the navigation stock remains and the AT is controlled again after the end of the AT). An effect is executed (Sg4).

  The continuous production is a production with a story that is performed over five games. Then, it is notified whether or not the AT is continued in the final game of the AT as a result of the effect. Specifically, for example, a state in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the sound corresponding thereto is output from the speakers 53 and 54. Then, in the final game of the AT, if the AT continues, the ally character wins, and if the AT does not continue, the enemy character wins and the effect ends.

  As described above, the continuous production that informs the possibility that the navigation stock different from the payout of the medal is given is executed, and the continuous production is won by the cherry to which the navigation stock may be given and is controlled by the AT. Since it is sometimes executed, it is possible to attract the attention of the player who is paying attention to the possibility that the navigation stock is given. In particular, since the continuous production is executed as a continuous production, the player's attention can be more attracted.

  In addition, since the continuous production is a production with a story, it is possible to attract the attention of the player who is paying attention to the continuous production with the story.

[Modification 2]
Next, a second modification of the first to third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second modification, a notification effect indicating that the net increase has exceeded the prescribed number is executed. Also, after the AT ends, the net increase is counted until 50 games are consumed. If the AT is controlled again by the AT before the 50 games are exhausted and the net increase reaches the specified number, the notification effect is not executed for the specified number already targeted for the notification effect. In addition, when the additional effect for notifying the number of additional games of the AT and the notification effect overlap, the execution of the additional effect is restricted. Then, when the additional condition is satisfied again, the additional effect is executed.

  Then, the display of reaching the specified number in FIG. 21 in the first embodiment and the display of reaching the specified number in FIG. 23 in the second embodiment can be implemented as a notification effect in the second modification. In addition, the additional display of the number of AT games in FIG. 26 in the third embodiment can be implemented as an additional effect in the second modification. Hereinafter, specific processing of Modification 2 will be described, but detailed description of the same portions as those of the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

[Notification effect execution processing]
Next, the notification effect execution process in the second modification will be described. The notification effect execution process in the second modification is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 30, in the notification effect execution process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not a medal payout has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main control unit 41. It is determined (Sm1). If no medals have been paid out, the process ends. When a medal is paid out, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sm2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is being performed. If the AT flag has not been set, the process ends. If the AT flag is set, it is determined whether or not the net increment counted by the net increment counter in the net increment counting process of FIG. ) Is determined (Sm3). If the net increase has not reached the prescribed number, the process ends.

  When the net increase has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the notified flag corresponding to the reached specified number is set (Sm4). That is, it is determined whether or not a notification effect for notifying that the net increase number has reached the specified number has already been executed with respect to the reached specified number. If the notification effect for the specified number of reaches has already been executed and the notification completion flag is set, the process ends.

  If the notification effect for the reached specified number has not yet been executed and the notified flag has not been set, the notification effect for notifying that the net increase number has reached the specified number is executed (Sm5). The notification effect is executed by displaying a message or a character indicating that from the liquid crystal display 51. When the notification effect is executed, a notification completion flag corresponding to the notified specified number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 91c, and the process ends (Sm6).

[Additional effect execution processing]
Next, an additional effect execution process in the second modification will be described. The additional effect execution process in the second modification is executed in the timer interrupt process (sub).

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the additional effect execution processing, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the reel stop position 3 command has been received from the main control unit 41 to determine whether or not the game has ended. A determination is made (Sr1). If the game has not ended, the process ends. When the game is over, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is set (Sr2). That is, it is determined whether or not AT is being performed. If the AT flag has not been set, the process ends. If the AT flag has been set, it is determined whether or not the additional effect flag has been set in Sj6 of FIG. 25 (Sr3). If the additional effect flag has not been set, the process ends.

  When the additional effect flag is set, it is determined whether or not a payout of medals has occurred by determining whether or not a winning number command from the main control unit 41 has been received (Sr4). If no medals have been paid out, the process proceeds to Sr6. When a payout of medals has occurred, it is determined whether or not the notification effect by Sm5 in FIG. 30 is executed (Sr5). If the notification effect is to be executed, the process ends. In Sr6, an additional effect is executed (Sr6). The additional effect is executed by displaying the number of additional games from the liquid crystal display 51. In addition, when the additional effect is not executed because the notification effect is being executed, when the additional condition is satisfied and the additional effect is performed when the additional effect is performed, the additional effect is performed at the time of the additional game. Only the number may be notified, or the number of added games which have not been notified because the additional effect has not been performed may be added and notified.

  Thus, when the execution of the additional effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the information effect is executed without executing the additional effect, and the additional effect is executed again when the additional condition is satisfied and the additional lottery is performed. Therefore, even if the execution time of the additional production is changed, the flow that the additional production is executed when the additional condition is satisfied does not collapse, so it is possible to progress the game so that the player does not feel uncomfortable it can.

  In addition, an additional effect that notifies the possibility that the number of additional games different from the payout of medals is added to the AT as the specific effect is executed, and the additional effect is executed when the watermelon is won. It can attract the attention of a player who is paying attention to the possibility of being played.

[Specific Examples in Modification Example 1 and Modification Example 2]
Next, specific examples in Modification Examples 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32 shows a specific example of restricting the second notification effect. FIG. 33 shows a specific example in which, when the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect overlap, the specific effect is executed without executing the notification effect. FIG. 34 shows a specific example in which when the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the specific effect overlap, the notification effect is executed without executing the specific effect.

[Specific examples of restricting information production]
As shown in FIG. 32, when the net increase number reaches the specified number of 1000 during the AT, a notification effect is executed (Sh3, Sh6 in FIG. 28). At this time, the notified flag is set (Sh7 in FIG. 28). Thereafter, even if the AT ends, the count of the net increase is continued up to 50 games after the end of the AT. Then, as shown in a non-AT section in the drawing, it is assumed that the AT is completed and the net increase is reduced. Next, it is assumed that an AT lottery is won within 50 games after the end of the AT, and the AT is controlled again. Then, it is assumed that the net addition number again reaches the prescribed number of 1000 in the AT again. At this time, since the notification effect has already been executed for the prescribed number of 1000 images, the execution of the notification effect is restricted (determined as Y in Sh4 in FIG. 28). Therefore, the notification effect is not executed.

[Specific examples that give priority to specific performances]
As shown in FIG. 33 (a), it is assumed that the 50th game, which is the final game of the first set of AT (the AT started by the consumption of the first navigation stock), is started. At this time, from the liquid crystal display 51, 994 images are displayed at the top of the screen as the net increase display 200 at the AT, and the 50th game is displayed at the top of the screen as the game number display 201 at the AT. . The liquid crystal display 51 displays a battle between the ally character 202 and the enemy character 203 as a continuous effect in the center of the screen. Further, a pressing order display 204 indicating the pressing order is displayed at the bottom of the screen as a navigation effect. The pressing order display indicates the pressing order by numbers. In the figure, the order of the center → right → left is shown as the push order display 204.

  Then, it is assumed that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated and the middle bell wins. When the middle bell wins, eight medals are paid out, so that the net number increase display 200 is updated to display 1002. At this time, the net increase number exceeds the specified number of 1000, but the execution of the continuous effect overlaps. Therefore, the notification effect is not executed and the continuous effect is executed (determined as Y in Sh5 in FIG. 28). In the continuous effect, a state in which the ally character 202 has defeated the enemy character 203 is displayed, and it is notified that the AT continues.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), when the second set of ATs is started after the navigation stock is consumed by one, the net increase display 200 is updated to a display showing 999 with three bets subtracted. You. The game number display 201 is updated to a display indicating the first game. At this time, it is assumed that the pressing order display 204 is displayed. Then, it is assumed that the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated as displayed and the middle bell is won. When the middle bell wins, eight medals are paid out, so that the net number increase display 200 is updated to display 1007. At this time, since the net increase number exceeds the specified number of 1000 and the continuous effect has not been executed, the notification effect is executed (Sh6 in FIG. 28). A message 205 is displayed in the center of the screen, indicating that the number of images exceeds the specified number of 1000 as the notification effect.

[Specific example of giving priority to notification production]
As shown in FIG. 34A, for example, it is assumed that the 25th game of the AT has started. At this time, 999 images are displayed at the top of the screen as the net number increase display 200, and the 25th game is displayed at the top of the screen as the AT game number display 201. The liquid crystal display 51 also displays a message 206 indicating that the watermelon (weak watermelon or strong watermelon) has been won. At this time, an additional lottery for determining the number of additional games of the AT is executed (Sj4 in FIG. 25).

  Then, it is assumed that the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated, and a watermelon falling to the right wins. When the watermelon descending to the right wins, five medals are paid out, and the net number increase display 200 is updated to display 1004. At this time, since the net increase number exceeds the specified number of 1000, the execution of the notification effect and the execution of the additional effect overlap, but the additional effect is not executed and the notification effect is executed (Sm5 in FIG. 30, FIG. Sr5 of 31 determines Y). Then, a message 205 is displayed in the center of the screen indicating that the specified number of images has been exceeded as the notification effect.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), assume that the 26th game of the AT has been started. The net number increase display 200 is updated to a display showing 1001 by subtracting three bets. The game number display 201 is updated to a display indicating the 26th game. The liquid crystal display 51 also displays a message 206 indicating that the watermelon (weak watermelon or strong watermelon) has been won. At this time, an additional lottery for determining the number of additional games of the AT is executed (Sj4 in FIG. 25).

  Then, it is assumed that the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated, and a watermelon falling to the right wins. When the watermelon falling to the right wins, five medals are paid out, and the net number increase display 200 is updated to a display indicating 1006. At this time, since the notification effect is not executed, an additional effect is executed (Sr6 in FIG. 31). Then, a message 207 indicating that 10 games have been added as an additional effect is displayed in the center of the screen.

[Modification 3]
Next, a third modification of the first to third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third modification, the display of the number of obtained medals during the AT is changed to the display of the number of added games of the AT.

  Then, the specified number reaching display and the acquired number display of FIG. 21 in the first embodiment, the specified number reaching display and the acquired number display of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment, and the acquired number display of FIG. By changing the display to the game number display, it is possible to apply the third modified example to the first to third embodiments. Hereinafter, specific processing of Modification 3 will be described, but detailed description of the same portions as those in the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

  First, the timer interrupt processing (sub) in the third modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, it is determined whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the RAM 91c (step Sd1). If no unprocessed command is stored (step Sd1; No), the process ends. When an unprocessed command is stored (Step Sd1; Yes), each effect device is controlled based on the oldest command. That is, the sub-control unit 91 controls each rendering device in the order of the received commands.

  The sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the command is an internal winning command (a command corresponding to the winning number command in the above embodiment) (Step Sd2). If the command is not an internal winning command (Step Sd2; No), the sub-control unit 91 executes a process according to the type of the command (Step Sd17), and ends the process. If the command is an internal winning command (step Sd2; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 stores the winning flag in the RAM 91c (step Sd3) and determines whether the AT flag is on (step Sd4). The AT flag is a flag that is set in the RAM 91c and indicates whether or not the vehicle is in the AT state. The AT flag is turned on when the vehicle is in the AT state, and is off when the vehicle is not in the AT state.

  When the AT flag is off (step Sd4; No), the sub control unit 91 performs an AT lottery process (step Sd5). After the AT lottery process, the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT has been won by the lottery process (step Sd6). If the AT is won (step Sd6; Yes), the AT flag in the RAM 91c is turned on (step Sd7), and the number of games (the number of won games) given to the AT game number counter set in the RAM 91c is added ( Step Sd8), proceed to the next process. In the third modification, the number of games (the number of games added to the AT game number counter) given when the player wins the AT in the AT lottery process becomes 50 games (50 games after shifting to the RT0 state). Is set in advance as follows.

  When the AT flag is on (step Sd4; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 performs an AT continuous lottery process of performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of additional games to the AT (the number of continuously won games, the privilege amount) ( A lottery corresponding to an additional lottery in the above embodiment is performed (step Sd9). When the sub control unit 91 executes the AT continuous lottery process, as shown in FIG. 36, it determines whether or not the internal winning of the cherry combination or the watermelon combination is performed (step Se1). Here, the cherry role is, specifically, “BB + cherry”, “BB + cherry + 1 sheet role”, “RB + cherry”, “RB + cherry one sheet role”, “cherry”, “cherry + 1 sheet role”, It means "bell 1 + watermelon + cherry (middle bell)" (see FIG. 7). In addition, the watermelon role is, specifically, “BB + watermelon”, “BB + watermelon + 1 sheet role”, “RB + watermelon”, “RB + watermelon + 1 sheet role”, “watermelon”, “watermelon + 1 sheet role”, “ Bell 1 + watermelon + cherry (middle bell).

  When the internal winning has been achieved for the cherry or watermelon role (step Se1; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 uses the continuous lottery table at the time of cherry winning or the continuous lottery table at the time of watermelon winning to continuously win the AT (additional game). A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give the number (step Se2).

  Here, the continuous lottery table at the time of cherry winning and the continuous lottery table at the time of watermelon winning will be described. In the continuous lottery table at the time of cherry winning, a ratio (continuous winning rate) to which the number of additional games of the AT is given when the internal winning command is the cherry combination is set. In the present embodiment, the rate at which the number of additional games is given when the internal winning command is the cherry role is ± 0, that is, the rate of non-winning is 50 [%], and the rate of +5 games is 5 [%]. The percentage of +10 games is 20%, the percentage of +30 games is 15%, the percentage of +50 games is 5%, the percentage of +100 games is 4.5%, and +300 games Is set to 0.5 [%].

  Further, in the continuous lottery table at the time of winning the watermelon, the rate at which the number of additional games of the AT is given when the internal winning command is the watermelon combination is set. In the present embodiment, as the rate at which the number of additional games is given when the internal winning command is a watermelon role, the rate of ± 0 (non-winning) is 90 [%], the rate of +5 games is 5 [%], The rate of +10 games is 0%, the rate of +30 games is 0%, the rate of +50 games is 3%, the rate of +100 games is 1%, and the rate of +300 games is 300%. It is set to 1 [%].

  Returning to FIG. 36, after the AT continuous lottery by winning the Cherry role or the watermelon role, or when not internally winning the Cherry role or the watermelon role (step Se1; No), the sub control unit 91 is set in the RAM 91c. With reference to the AT medal acquisition number counter, it is determined whether or not the medal acquisition number (medal net increase) since the start of the AT has reached a specific game history reaching a predetermined number (step Se3).

  Note that, in order to perform such control, the sub-control unit 91 of the third modification uses the winning determination command (command indicating the result of the winning determination) received from the main control unit 41 to record the number of obtained medals as history data. Stored in the RAM 91c, the AT medal acquisition number counter counts (counts) the medal acquisition number (medal net increase) from the start of the AT from the history data. In the third modification, 100, 250, 500, 1000,... Are set as the predetermined number. Therefore, in the third modification, for a plurality of predetermined numbers, the number of differences up to the next predetermined number (100-0 = 100 [sheets], 250-100 = 150 [sheets], 500-250 = 250 [sheets], (1000-500 = 500 [sheets]) is set in advance. In the third modification, the average net add-on of the medals in the RT0 to RT3 states during the AT control is 2 or more. / 2 = 50 [G]), and the next 250 cards are reached in 75 games or less ((250−100) / 2 = 50 [G]).

  In addition, in the third modification, the average net increment of medals in the RT0 to RT3 states during the AT control is 2 or more, and the AT can perform at least 50 games after shifting to the RT0 to 3 states. The rate at which the number of medals obtained after shifting to the RT0 to RT3 states reaches 100 is higher than the rate at which the number does not reach 100. Further, in the present embodiment, the average net increment of the medals in the other gaming states before the transition to the RT0 to RT3 state during the AT control is 1 or more, and the AT is the AT game number counter until the transition to the RT0 to RT3 state. Does not digest the rest of the game. For this reason, the rate at which the number of obtained medals reaches 100 after the start of the AT is higher than the rate at which the number does not reach 100.

  When the number of medals obtained after the start of the AT has not reached the predetermined number (Step Se3; No), the sub-control unit 91 ends the AT lottery process. On the other hand, when the number of medals obtained after the start of the AT reaches the predetermined number (Step Se3; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not to continuously win the AT using the continuous lottery table for obtaining the predetermined number. (Step Se4), and the AT lottery process ends.

  Here, the continuous lottery table at the time of obtaining the predetermined number will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 15 (C), in the continuous lottery table when 100 coins are acquired, the rate at which the number of additional games in the AT is given when the number of medals acquired since the start of the AT becomes 100. Is set. In the third modification, the ratio of the number of added games when the number of medals acquired after the start of the AT reaches 100 is ± 0 (non-winning) as 0 [%] and +5 games. The ratio is 40 [%], the ratio of +10 games is 40 [%], the ratio of +30 games is 10 [%], the ratio of +50 games is 5 [%], and the ratio of +100 games is 4 [%]. , +300 games is set to 1 [%]. Therefore, in the third modification, when the number of medals acquired from the start of the AT reaches 100, the continuous lottery table at the time of acquiring 100 is set such that the AT is continuously won and the number of additional games is increased by +5 or more. Have been.

  In addition, for example, in the continuous lottery table at the time of obtaining 250 coins, the ratio at which the number of additional games in the AT is given when the number of tokens acquired after the start of the AT becomes 250 coins is set. In the third modification, as a rate at which the number of additional games is given when the number of medals acquired after the start of the AT becomes 250, a rate of ± 0 (non-winning) is 40 [%] and +5 games. The ratio is 10 [%], the ratio of +10 games is 30 [%], the ratio of +30 games is 10 [%], the ratio of +50 games is 5 [%], and the ratio of +100 games is 4 [%]. , +300 games is set to 1 [%]. Although illustration is omitted, when the number of medals acquired after the start of the AT becomes 500, 1000, or the like, 500 medals similar to the continuous lottery table for acquiring 250 medals shown in FIG. A continuous lottery table at the time of acquisition and a continuous lottery table at the time of acquisition of 1000 sheets are provided. Therefore, in the third modification, when the number of obtained medals from the start of the AT becomes 250, 500, 1000,..., Each continuation lottery table in which the AT continuation is not won and the additional game number may not be given. Are set respectively. In the third modification, the continuous lottery table at the time of obtaining each predetermined number of sheets other than the continuous lottery table at the time of obtaining 100 pieces has exemplified the case where the non-winning rate is not 0%. It may be 0% as in the lottery table (the number of additional games may be given at a rate of 100%).

  Returning to FIG. 35, after the AT continuation lottery process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT continuation is won by the continuation lottery process (step Sd10). If the AT continuation is won (step Sd10; Yes), the number of additional games given to the AT game number counter set in the RAM 91c is added (step Sd11). In the third modification, in the AT lottery process and the AT continuous lottery process, when the winning flag is the combination of the cherry and one-sheet, the AT winning and the AT continuous winning are set in advance at a rate of 100%.

  If the AT continuation has not been won (step Sd10; Yes), or after winning the AT continuation and adding the number of games to the AT game number counter, the sub-control unit 91 refers to the RAM 91c and sets the winning flag to “Normal” It is determined whether the flag indicates "replay" (step Sd12). If the winning flag is a flag indicating "normal replay" (step Sd12; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 executes an internal push order navigation determination process (step Sd13). The internal pressing order navigation determining process is a process of determining whether or not to notify the internal pressing order specified from the received internal winning command.

  In the third modification, the main control unit 41 externally outputs a special signal on condition that the value of the continuous correct answer counter becomes “3”. The external device that has received the special signal can display the number of times controlled to the AT state (AT number) so that the player can recognize it. The AT count at this time is required to be an accurate value.

  Here, in the case of a configuration in which the AT is terminated on condition that the predetermined number of games have been consumed, as in the slot machine 1 of the third modification, for example, “transition to AT state—special role winning / winning-bonus state” The AT state may be interrupted due to a transition to the bonus state, for example, "transition-end of bonus-transition to AT state again". At this time, if the special signal is externally output when the AT state is simply started, the special signal is externally output again even after the AT state is interrupted. Although the number of ATs is one, that is, the actual number of ATs is one, there is a possibility that the special signal is externally output twice and the number of displayed ATs is displayed as two.

  For this reason, in the third modification, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not to notify the internal pressing order based on the game situation. That is, the sub-control unit 91 notifies the internal pressing order when the special signal needs to be output externally by making the internal pressing order correct, and notifies the internal pressing order when the special signal does not need to be externally output. do not do. However, even when the internal pressing order is not notified, there is a possibility that the value of the continuous correct answer counter becomes “3” by the operation of the player and a special signal is output. In order to avoid such a situation, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the internal pressing order should not be output when there is no need to output a special signal and the value of the continuous correct answer counter may be “3”. Reports a different push order (incorrect push order).

  Hereinafter, a situation determined by the sub control unit 91 will be described. When the sub-control unit 91 "transfers to the AT state for the first time after winning the AT and the gaming state is the RT0 to RT3 state (at the time of the initial hit AT)", Is in the state of RT0 to RT3 (at the time of AT after the power failure), it is determined that the special signal needs to be externally output.

  In addition, even if the gaming state is in the RT0 to RT3 state, the sub-control unit 91 determines that “the AT state has been shifted to the AT state after the interruption of the AT and the gaming state is in the RT0 to 3 state (at the time of AT after the interruption)”. In the case where the state shifts to the RT0 to RT3 state after the mistake in the order (at the time of RT after the mistake in the pushing order) or the like, it is determined that there is no need to externally output the special signal.

  For these determinations, a flag based on the number of AT digestion games can be used. In this case, for example, at the start of the AT digestion, the sub-control unit 91 turns on the flag set in the RAM 91c when the number of AT digestion games is 0 (at the time of the initial hit AT). While the flag is on, the sub-control unit 91 keeps informing the order of internal pressing, turns off the flag on condition that the value of the continuous correct answer counter becomes “3”, and reports the correct answer of the internal pressing order. Restrict. That is, turning on the flag means that it is necessary to output the special signal externally, and turning off the flag means that it is not necessary to output the special signal externally.

  Further, when a power interruption occurs, the flag may be turned on depending on whether or not the game state is the RT3 state at the time of the power interruption processing or the start-up processing. Since the flag is turned on after the power failure, the sub-control unit 91 keeps informing the internal pressing order until the value of the continuous correct answer counter becomes “3”, and when the value of the continuous correct answer counter becomes “3”, The main control unit 41 outputs a special signal to the outside.

  In order to perform such control, it is assumed that a continuous correct answer counter is set in the RAM 91c in the sub-control unit 91 as in the main control unit 41. The trigger for updating the continuous correct answer counter may include the value of the continuous correct answer counter in the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91, and may be updated to the same value by the sub control unit 91 receiving the command. The update may be performed by the sub control unit 91 autonomously executing the same processing as the processing of the main control unit 41.

  After the internal push order navigation determination processing, after turning on the AT flag, or when the AT has not been won (step Sd6; No), the sub-control unit 91 stores in the ROM 91a based on the AT flag and the winning flag. The stored effect pattern is selected (step Sd14). Here, when the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at the selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery, that is, the winning flag, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selectivity of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91a. When the internal control command is received, the sub-control unit 91 refers to the select ratio from the effect table according to the winning flag, and An effect pattern is selected according to the selection rate, and the selected effect pattern is set in the RAM 91c. When an effect pattern has already been set in the RAM 91c, such as during a continuous effect, the sub-control unit 91 proceeds with the process according to the effect pattern without selecting a new effect pattern.

  After the effect pattern is selected, the sub-control unit 91 acquires a control pattern with reference to the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91a, and sets the acquired control pattern in the RAM 91c (step Sd15). In the control pattern table, various patterns corresponding to the types of commands are registered for each of a plurality of types of effect patterns. The effect pattern is, for example, a display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 or a lighting mode of the effect LED 52. In accordance with the control pattern table, the sub-control unit 91 executes the effect control according to the progress of the game.

  When a new command is received during the control of the effect triggered by the reception of the command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the control of the effect being executed, and the effect corresponding to the newly received command. Execute the control of. That is, even if the effect control is not completed, the effect can be canceled and the effect control based on the new command can be executed. For example, even when an effect based on a command is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, if the player starts the game before the effect is completed, the effect is canceled.

  Controlling the effect that is being executed in response to a command associated with an operation required when the player starts the game, such as a BET command received when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated and an internal winning command received when the start switch 7 is operated. May be canceled. With such a configuration, the player does not have to be bothered when he wants to quickly start the next game. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which, even for a specific effect, control of the effect is continued even if any command is received. In this case, the player can have a sense of expectation when the specific effect described above occurs.

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 executes the effect control according to the effect pattern (step Sd16), and ends the process. As described above, the effect patterns are selected according to the selection rate. Therefore, even if the same internal winning command as a result of the same internal lottery is received, the effect patterns are not necessarily the same.

  In the third modification, when an effect pattern is selected based on various commands (step Sd14, step Sd17), the sub-control unit 91 executes an effect pattern selection process of selecting an effect pattern to be executed on the liquid crystal display 51. I do. After performing the effect pattern selection process, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether or not the AT flag is on, as shown in FIG. 37 (step Sf1). When the AT flag is off (step Sf1; No), the sub control unit 91 selects a normal effect pattern (step Sf2), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the AT flag is on (step Sf1; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 selects the number notification effect shown in FIG. 38A (step Sf3), and acquires the AT medals set in the RAM 91c. With reference to the number counter, it is determined whether or not the number of medals obtained since the start of the AT (medal net increase) has reached a predetermined number (step Sf4).

  Here, the number notification effect 501 is an effect of notifying the number of medal acquisitions (medal net increase) from the start of the AT counted by the AT medal acquisition number counter. As shown in FIG. 38A, the number notification effect 501 of the present embodiment is, for example, “TOTAL + 17 sheets” in a display mode that is inconspicuous for a player when the number of medals obtained after the start of the AT is 17 Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. For example, an effect in which a person image is displayed at the center of the liquid crystal display 51 and smaller than the person image at the lower right end of the liquid crystal display 51.

  Returning to FIG. 37, when the number of medals acquired since the start of the AT has reached the predetermined number (step Sf4; Yes), the sub control unit 91 determines the number of additional games and the predetermined number by the AT continuous lottery process shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is a common number (step Sf5). For example, when the number of additional games is +10 and the predetermined number is 100, “1” and “0” are common numbers. For example, when the number of additional games is +5 and the predetermined number is 100, there is no common number.

When there is a number common to the number of additional games and the predetermined number of games (step Sf5; Yes), the sub-control unit 91 selects the continuous winning notification notification effect of the partial destruction pattern shown in FIG. 38B (step Sf6). .
Here, the continuous winning notification informing effect is an effect of notifying whether or not the AT continuous lottery process has been executed and the number of added games has been given (whether or not the AT has been continuously won). In addition, the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern is, when there is a common number between the predetermined number of games and the number of additional games, the predetermined number of games in the effect pattern to destroy the number that is not common with the number of additional games. This is an effect of changing the number of added games and notifying whether or not the AT has been continuously won. In the present embodiment, the continuous winning notification informing effect of each pattern is a continuous effect performed until one game ends, but may be a continuous effect performed over a plurality of games.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (B), the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern of the present embodiment is, for example, the number information displaying effect 502 that displays an image of a character string “TOTAL + 100 sheets”. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 after the character string of "TOTAL +100" is overwritten with the character string of "0" with the image of the explosion, and the character string of "+10" is left. This is a continuous effect in which an additional notification effect 504 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 by displaying an image of a character string of “additional + 10G” by changing other character strings in the state. In addition, in the additional notification effect 504 of the present embodiment, other character strings are changed without moving the character string of “+10”, but other character strings are changed while moving the character string of “+10”. You may. Although not shown in the drawings, the continuous winning notification notification effect of the partial destruction pattern of the present embodiment is performed when the AT continuous lottery is not won, that is, when the number of additional games is ± 0, After displaying a partial destruction effect in which the character string of “+10” of “TOTAL +100” is overwritten with the image of the explosion on the liquid crystal display 51, the image of the character string such as “Additional ± 0G! An additional notification effect to be displayed on the display 51 is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 37, when there is no common number between the number of additional games and the predetermined number (step Sf5; No), the sub control unit 91 selects the continuous winning notification notification effect of the all destruction pattern shown in FIG. 38 (C). (Step Sf7). Here, the continuous winning notification notification effect of the all destruction pattern means that when there is no common number between the predetermined number and the number of added games, the predetermined number is changed to the number of added games in an effect pattern that destroys all of the predetermined number of numbers. This is an effect to notify whether or not the AT has been continuously won. As shown in FIG. 38 (C), for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), after the number notification effect 502 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, all character strings are displayed as explosion images. A continuous effect of displaying the overwritten all destruction effect 505 on the liquid crystal display 51 and then changing the character string to display an image of the character string “additional + 5G” on the liquid crystal display 51, and executing the additional information effect 506. is there.

  Returning to FIG. 37, after the selection of the continuous winning notification information effect or when the number of obtained medals has not reached the predetermined number since the start of the AT (step Sf4; No), the sub control unit 91 sets the cherry or watermelon role. , The AT continuous lottery process is executed due to the internal winning, and it is determined whether or not the AT continuous winning is performed (step Sf8). If the AT has not been won due to the cherry or watermelon role (step Sf8; No), the sub-control unit 91 ends the process, and if the AT has been continuously won due to the cherry or watermelon role (step Sf8; Yes), the continuous winning notification effect 507 after the completion of all the effects shown in FIG. 38 (D) is selected, and the process ends.

  Here, the continuous winning notification effect 507 after the end of all the effects is an effect of notifying that the AT has been continuously won by the Cherry role or the watermelon role executed at the end of one game and the last of all the effects. . As shown in FIG. 38 (D), for example, as shown in FIG. 38 (D), in the case where the AT is continuously won by the Cherry role winning, an image of a character string of “additional + 10G” is displayed as shown in FIG. And an image of cherry on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Next, a specific control of the slot machine 1 according to the third modification will be described.

  In the AT state, the sub-control is performed when the internal winning of the Cherry role or the watermelon role or when the number of obtained medals from the start of the AT reaches a predetermined number (100, 250, 500, 1000,...). The unit 91 performs an AT lottery process using the continuous lottery table. Also, the sub-control unit 91 executes the number notification effect 501 shown in FIG. 38 (A) to notify the number of obtained medals after the start of the AT, and when the number of obtained medals reaches the predetermined number, the continuous winning notification effect. And notifies the number of added games to notify the AT continuation winning. Here, when there is a common number between the predetermined number and the number of additional games, the sub-control unit 91 executes a continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern shown in FIG. When there is no common number between and, the continuous winning notification informing effect of the all destruction pattern shown in FIG. 38 (C) is executed. Then, regardless of whether or not the number of obtained medals is a predetermined number, when the AT is continuously won by the internal winning of the Cherry role or the watermelon role, the sub-control unit 91 ends FIG. ) To execute the continuous winning notification notification effect 507 after the end of all the effects, and notifies that the number of games has been added by winning the AT continuously by winning the cherry or watermelon role.

  Then, in the modified example 3 configured as described above, the counting of the net number of medals is configured to end when a predetermined period (for example, 50 games) has elapsed after the end of the AT. Then, the net additional number of medals reaches a predetermined number (corresponding to the prescribed number in the above embodiment), and the net additional number is notified by a notification effect (display of “+100 sheets!” In FIGS. 38A and 38B), Thereafter, when the net additional number of medals decreases and the net additional number of medals reaches a predetermined number again, the execution of the notification effect is restricted. As a result, while the AT ends and the net increase decreases, the net increase again falls below the prescribed number, but the AT is controlled again by the AT before the number of games after the AT reaches 50 games, and the net increase again becomes the prescribed number. , Etc., it is possible to prevent the player from impressing that the number of medals has decreased after the end of the AT.

  In the third modification, when the net number of medals reaches a predetermined number, a notification effect (“+100 images!” In FIGS. 38A and 38B) and a continuous notification corresponding to the specific effect. It is also possible to configure so that the effects are not uniformly overlapped, the continuous notification effect is executed without executing the notification effect, and then the notification effect is executed when a medal is paid out. By this, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow that the notification effect is executed when the payout of the medal occurs is not collapsed, so that the player proceeds with the game so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Can be.

  In the third modification, when the net number of medals reaches a predetermined number, a notification effect (“+100 images!” In FIGS. 38A and 38B) and a continuous notification corresponding to the specific effect. It is also possible to configure so that the effects are not uniformly overlapped, the notification effect is executed without executing the continuous notification effect, and then the continuous notification effect is executed when the net increase number reaches a predetermined number. Thus, even if the execution time of the continuous notification effect is changed, the flow of the continuous notification effect being executed when the net increase reaches the predetermined number does not collapse, so that the game is performed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Can proceed.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, the sub-control unit 91 executes the number notification effect 501 for notifying the number of obtained medals after the start of the AT as shown in FIG. I do. Then, the sub-control unit 91 executes the AT continuation lottery process when the number of medals obtained after the start of the AT reaches a predetermined number, and notifies whether or not the AT continuation win and the number of additional games has been provided. Execute the continuous winning announcement information production. At this time, in the third modification, as shown in FIGS. 38 (B) and 38 (C), the sub-control unit 91 adds the additional game effect 504 which informs the number of additional games from the number information effect 502 which informs the predetermined number. , 506 is executed as a continuous winning notification informing effect.

  In this way, the AT continuous lottery is performed not only at the time of winning the cherry or watermelon role but also when the number of medals acquired after the start of the AT reaches a predetermined number, so that the cherry or watermelon role is won. It is possible to increase the possibility that the AT continuation lottery will be performed compared to the slot machine that performs the AT continuation lottery only when the player does not win the cherry or watermelon role with a low winning rate. Since the expectation can be held, the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the slot machine 1 of the third modification plays the relevance between the number of medal acquisitions and the number of additional games as compared with the slot machine that does not report the number of additional games by the effect pattern that changes from the number information production to the continuous winning information production. This makes it easier for the player to recognize, so that when the number of medals acquired since the start of the AT has reached a predetermined number, it is possible to effectively notify that the AT has been continuously won.

  In particular, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, the number of medals obtained since the start of the AT as an advantageous event obtained by the player, that is, the net increase in medals is determined by whether or not to perform the AT continuous lottery. Has become.

  In this manner, the player can not only obtain a sense of satisfaction with the game by increasing the number of medals obtained since the start of the AT, but also increase the number of medals obtained from the start of the AT, thereby increasing the number of medals obtained. Since it is possible to expect that the number of medals obtained may be further increased due to the number being given, the user becomes more interested in the number of medals obtained after the start of the AT, and obtains medals after the start of the AT. Even if the number reaches a predetermined number, the interest of the game can be improved more than the slot machine in which the AT continuous lottery process is not executed.

  In the third modification, the target for determining whether or not to perform the AT continuous lottery is the net medal increase from the start of the AT, but any other event may be used as long as it is an advantageous event obtained by the player. For example, the target of determining whether or not to perform the AT continuous lottery may be the number of medals paid out after the start of the AT. Further, for example, the longer the period of the AT state is, the more advantageous the player is, and it is possible to obtain a degree of satisfaction with the game. The number, the number of digested navigator stocks, and the number of digested navigators (the number of executions of the navigator effect) may be used. Here, the navigation stock indicates an amount (the number of sets) that can be controlled by the AT due to its large number. By consuming (subtracting) the number of navigation stocks by one, the AT is controlled while the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 40), and the navigation effect can be executed during that time. For this reason, as the determined number of navigation stocks increases, the AT is controlled over a longer period of time, and the degree of advantage for the player can be said to be higher. When the determination target is the number of digested navi stocks, for example, when a predetermined number of navi stocks are digested, a determination is made as to whether or not to provide a new navi stock at a rate of 50% and continue AT. Can be considered. When the determination target is the digestion navigation number, for example, in a configuration in which the number of executable navigation effects is given 20 times at the time of winning the AT, a new navigation effect is executed at a rate of 50% after the predetermined number of navigation effects is executed. A configuration is conceivable in which it is determined whether the AT is continued by giving the executable number of times.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, the sub-control unit 91 determines that when the number of medals obtained after the start of the AT has reached the predetermined number, the predetermined number and the number of added games have a common number. 38B, a continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern shown in FIG. 38B is executed, and an image of a character string common to the number information effect 502 and the additional information effect 504 (an image of “+10”) is left. The destruction effect 503 is executed.

  By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the association between the medal acquisition number reaching the predetermined number and the number of additional games than the slot machine that does not execute the continuous winning notification effect of the partial destruction pattern. can do.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the number of medals acquired since the start of the AT has reached the predetermined number and the number of additional games has been added, so that the cherry or watermelon role is won. When the additional game number is also given, the continuous winning notification effect is performed, and then the continuous winning information effect 507 after the completion of all the effects shown in FIG. 38D is executed.

  By doing so, the number of additional games is increased by the fact that the number of medals acquired since the start of the AT has reached a predetermined number, compared to the slot machine which does not execute the continuous winning notification effect after the completion of all the effects after executing the continuous winning notification effect. Can be reduced in the game to which the player cannot recognize that the privilege is given even by winning the cherry or watermelon role.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, during the AT control, the sub-control unit 91 gives the additional game number for continuing the AT by setting the predetermined number of medals to be acquired after the start of the AT. Decide whether or not to be done.

  By doing so, the player becomes more interested in the number of medals obtained after the start of the AT than in the slot machine in which the number of additional games is not given by the predetermined number of medals obtained after the start of the AT. , The interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, the sub control unit 91 sets a plurality of predetermined numbers, such as 100, 250,. Then, in the RT3 state during the AT control, the average obtained number of medals does not change. For this reason, the average number of games from 0 to 100 medals acquired after the start of the AT and the transition to the RT3 state is 2/3 times (100 times the average number of games from 100 to 250 medals). / 150 = 2/3 [times]). In addition to the average number of games, for example, the average number of navigation times of the push order bell from 0 to 100 is 2/3 times the average number of navigation times of the push order bell from 100 to 250 sheets. . As a result, the expected value (the average number of games, the average number of navigations, etc.) until the number of obtained medals reaches the first predetermined number (100) after the start of the AT reaches the next predetermined number (250). It is 1.5 times the expected value up to. In the present embodiment, the expected value until the first predetermined number is reached is the highest, and the expected value until the predetermined number is reached as the predetermined number increases to 250, 500, 1000,... Is set to be low.

  By doing in this way, when the number of obtained medals reaches 100 after the start of the AT, the number of obtained medals reaches 250 from 250, 500 from 250, and 1000 from 500 compared to when the number of obtained medals reaches 100 from 250. When a predetermined number is reached in a short period, the AT continuous lottery is performed. For this reason, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the smaller the predetermined number is, the easier it is to reach the predetermined number, and the number of additional games is easy to be given. It can be expected that the number of games will be given. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is difficult to reach the predetermined number as the predetermined number increases, so that the expectation and the gambling of the additional game number of the player are excessively increased. Can be prevented.

  In particular, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, when the number of medals acquired after the start of the AT reaches 100, the sub-control unit 91 acquires 100 cards so that the number of additional games is always given by +5 or more. The continuous lottery table of the time is set in advance. In the present embodiment, the average net increase in medals per game in the RT0 to RT3 states in the AT state is 2 or more, and the number of games to be awarded when the player wins the AT changes to the RT3 state. Is set in advance so as to increase the probability that the number of medals acquired after the start of the AT will be 100.

  By doing so, the player can expect that the number of medals obtained since the start of the AT will be 100, the number of additional games will be given, and the AT will be continued. The interest of the game is more improved than a slot machine in which the number of acquired games is unlikely to become 100 or a slot machine in which the number of added games is not given even when the number of games reaches 100.

  In the third modification, the number of medals acquired after the start of the AT may not reach 100, and the AT may not always be continued. May be provided so that AT is continued. For example, the sub-control unit 91 may control the AT to be continued until the number of medals acquired after the start of the AT reaches 100, without setting the number of games at the time of winning the AT. In addition, for example, when the AT is won, a condition such as “the number of remaining games is 0 and the medal net increase is 100 or more” is set as the AT end condition, and the number of tokens acquired since the start of the AT reliably reaches 100. The AT may be controlled until it is. In this case, it is necessary to control the sub-control unit 91 so that the AT can be continued when the number of remaining medals has not reached 100 when the number of remaining games becomes 0. By doing so, when the AT is started, the player can be confident that the number of medals acquired will be 100, the number of added games will be given, and the AT will be continued. Is more entertaining than a slot machine that may not be extended.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the third modification, the RT0 to 3 states are set to the advantageous RT, and the AT in the RT3 state is more advantageous to the player than the AT in the normal state, the RT1 state, and the RT4 state. The average net increase of medals is set to be high. Then, the sub-control unit 91 counts the number of obtained medals after the start of the AT and determines whether or not to add the number of added games regardless of the gaming state (normal state / RT1 to RT3 state, SB state). . Further, the sub-control unit 91 is set so that the remaining game number of the AT game number counter is not exhausted until the state is shifted to the RT0 to 3 state, and the normal state, the RT1 state, and the RT4 state until the state is shifted to the RT0 to 3 state. Even in this state, the average net increase of medals is set to be 1 or more if controlled by the AT.

  In this way, if the AT is also controlled in the normal state, the RT1 state, and the RT4 state before transitioning to the RT0 to RT3 states, the remaining game number of the AT is not exhausted and the number of tokens acquired increases (net increase). ), The number of medals acquired after the start of the AT is more likely to reach a predetermined number than in a slot machine in which the number of medals acquired is not counted for the AT in the normal state, RT1 state, or RT4 state in which the medals can be purely increased, and the number of additional games is increased. Since it is easy to be provided, the player can expect that the number of additional games is provided, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Modification 4]
Next, a third modification of the first to third embodiments will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth modification, the timing at which the insertion (credit) / payment is allowed after the replay winning is performed is when the automatic BET due to the replay winning is completed or when the automatic BET due to the replay winning is started (or started). .

  Also in the first to third embodiments, the timing of insertion and settlement when various types of replays are won is set to be the same as that of the fourth embodiment, so that the fourth embodiment is modified to the first to third embodiments. Can be applied. Hereinafter, specific processing of Modification Example 4 will be described, but detailed description of the same portions as those in the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

[BET processing]
First, the BET process executed by the main control unit 41 in Sd1 of the game process shown in FIG. 7 will be described. FIGS. 39 to 41 are flowcharts showing the control contents of the BET process executed by the main control unit.

  In the BET processing, first, the value of the BET counter in which the value of the bet is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41 is cleared (S10), and the prescribed number (the upper limit in the present embodiment, In any game state, 3) is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 (S11), and whether or not a replay game flag indicating a replay game is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is determined. Then, it is determined whether or not the next game (the game to be started from now) is a replay game (S12).

  If it is determined in S12 that the next game (a game to be started from now on) is a replay game, a rip freeze process for generating a rip freeze at the time of the bell lip winning is executed (S13). The rip freeze process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the end of the re-freeze processing, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 in S14, and the specified number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is referred to, and the value of the BET counter is set to the specified number (here, It is determined whether or not 3), that is, whether or not a bet amount serving as a game start condition is set (S15). If the value of the BET counter is not a specified number, the process returns to S14. When the value of the BET counter reaches the specified number and the setting of the bet number by the replay winning is completed, the process proceeds to S16. After the value of the BET counter is added, the main control unit 41 executes a process of sequentially lighting the 1BETLED 14, the 2BETLED15, and the 3BETLED16 according to the value of the BET counter. Further, after the setting of the number of bets after the winning of the replay has been completed, the main control unit 41 executes a process of turning on the replaying LED 20 and the start valid LED 18 (the waiting LED 19 during the wait).

  In S16, it is determined whether or not the replays that have been won in the previous game are the normal lip, the seven-matched lip, and the seven rake clips 1 to 5 (these replays are collectively referred to as a first replay hereinafter). . The first replay may be a normal replay only among replays composed of only the same symbols. Whether it was the first replay or not is specified from the set replay game flag. If it is determined in S16 that the first replay has been made, the bet amount is added to 3 (because the replay winning state is 3 bets) in S17, and a bet sound is output by the sub control unit 91. A BET command indicating that there is a BET sound to be made (in S17, for convenience, is indicated as “BET command (BET sound exists)”; the same applies hereinafter) is set in the normal command transmission buffer.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S16 that the bet is not the first replay, a BET command (S18) indicating that the bet amount is added by 3 in S18 and that the BET sound is not output by the sub-control unit 91 so as not to be output. In this example, “BET command (no BET sound)” is shown for convenience, and the same applies to the following. When it is determined that the first replay is not the first replay, it is determined that the first replay is a normal lip, a seven-piece lip, and a seven-flip lip 1 to 5 and that the prize has won a ber lip 1 to 5 It was when it was done. Hereinafter, replays other than the first replay are also referred to as second replays, and here correspond to Bell rep 1 to 5. In addition, the second replay may include 7 fake clips 1 to 5 composed of a combination of symbols including different symbols, or may include a seven-line rip which is an AT lottery trigger described later. Is also good.

  The BET commands set in S17 and S18 are transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main). As a result, the sub-control unit 91 outputs a bet sound every time the bet amount is set after the first replay prize, whereas the bet amount is set after the second replay prize. Will not output the BET sound. This makes it easier for the player to notice the first replay prize, while making it difficult for the player to notice the second replay prize.

  In S19, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter, which is the value of the credit stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit 41, is 50, which is the upper limit value. If it is determined in S19 that the value is the upper limit value, a setting flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 (S20), and the process proceeds to S22. In S20, when the insertion impossible flag is set, a process for turning off the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 is performed. When the BET counter is set to the specified number by the second replay winning, without turning off the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 in S20, for example, it is determined to be YES in S37 to be described later or the replay freeze ends. After that, or after a credit command (with BET sound) corresponding to 3 BETs is output, the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are turned off.

  When it is determined in S19 that the value is not the upper limit value, that is, when it is determined that credit can be inserted, the process proceeds to S21. If it is determined in S12 that the game is not a replay game, the process directly proceeds to S21.

  In S21, the setting before the waiting for insertion is performed, and the process proceeds to S22. In the setting before the waiting for insertion, if the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41, the insertion impossible flag is cleared and the medal can be inserted. For this reason, after the replay prize winning, medals inserted when the setting of the bet amount is not completed and the setting before waiting for insertion is not yet performed are not accepted, and the setting of the bet amount is completed and inserted. The medals inserted after the setting before waiting is performed are effectively received and credits are added. The main controller 41 turns on the insertion request LED 17 after the setting before waiting for insertion is performed in S21 and clears the insertion impossible flag, and sets the BET switch valid LED 21 when the bet amount can be set. The lighting process is performed. When the BET counter is set to the specified number by the first replay winning, only the insertion request LED 17 is turned on in S21. When the BET counter is set to the specified number by the second replay winning, the turn-on request LED 17 and the BET switch enable LED 21 are turned on in S21. After the credit command (with BET sound) corresponding to 3 BETs is output, the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 are turned off.

  In S22, it is determined whether or not the medal can be inserted based on whether or not the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. If it is determined in S22 that the medal can be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and the medal can be inserted using the medal flow path on the hopper tank side ( S23), proceeding to S25, when it is determined that the medal can not be inserted, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the medal flow path is set as a path on the medal payout exit 9 side to obtain a new medal. Is prohibited (S24), and the process proceeds to S25.

  In S25, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is on. If the setting key switch 37 is on, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0 (S26). If the value of the BET counter is 0 in S26, the confirmation start command is set in the normal command transmission buffer (S27), and the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process (S28), that is, the setting confirmation state. The confirmation start command set in S27 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main). After the setting confirmation processing in S28 ends, the process returns to S22. If the setting key switch 37 is not on in S25 or if the value of the BET counter is not 0 in S26, the process proceeds to S30.

  In S30, it is determined whether or not the detection result of the inserted medal sensor 31 has become an appropriate detection result and the passage of the inserted medal has been detected, that is, the presence or absence of the inserted medal flag indicating that the passage of the inserted medal has been detected. If the passage of the inserted medal is not detected in S30, the process proceeds to S45. If the passage of the inserted medal is detected, the inserted medal flag is cleared (S31), and the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. It is determined whether or not medals can be inserted based on whether or not medals can be inserted (S32). If not, the process proceeds to S45.

  If the medal can be inserted in S32, the CPU refers to the specified number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41, and determines whether or not the value of the BET counter is the specified number (S33). If the value of the BET counter is not a prescribed number, a BET command (with BET sound) indicating that the bet amount is to be added by 1 and that a BET sound is to be output by the sub-control unit 91 is sent as a normal command. The value is set in the trust buffer (S34), the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 (S35), and the process returns to S22. The BET command set in S34 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main). Thus, when the bet amount is set by inserting a medal, the BET sound is output on the sub control unit 91 side.

  If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in S33, it is determined in S36 whether or not the second replay has won in the previous game. Whether or not the second replay has been performed is identified from the replay game flag. If it is determined in S36 that the second replay has not been won in the previous game, a credit command indicating the value of the credit counter after adding 1 and indicating that the sub control unit 91 outputs a credit sound is determined in S38. (In S38, for convenience, it is indicated as "credit command (normal)." The same applies hereinafter.) Is set in the normal command transmission buffer. Is incremented by one. The credit command set in S38 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main).

  If it is determined in S36 that the second replay has been won in the previous game, it is determined in S37 whether a specified number of BET sounds have been output. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the credit command shown in S39 has been output three times as much as the specified number. When the bet amount is set after winning the second replay, the BET command (no bet sound) is output as shown in S18, so that the sub control unit 91 does not output the bet sound. For this reason, after the second replay winning, after the bet amount is set, when a medal is inserted and credit is performed, a process for outputting a BET sound up to a specified number of times is performed.

  In S37, when the prescribed number of BET sounds have not been output, in S39, a credit command indicating the value of the credit counter after adding 1 and indicating that the sub control unit 91 outputs the credit sound (in S39, for convenience, "Credit command (with BET sound)" is set in the normal command transmission buffer, and the value of the credit counter, in which the credit value is stored in the RAM of the main control unit 41, is incremented by 1 in S40. I do. The credit command set in S39 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main). On the other hand, if the specified number of BET sounds have already been output in S37, the process proceeds to S38, and the credit command (normal) is set in the normal command transmission buffer. As a result, when credits are added by inserting medals after the second replay prize, the sub control unit 91 outputs a BET sound for the third card and a credit sound for the fourth card and thereafter. You. On the other hand, when credits are added by inserting a medal when the second replay has not been won, the sub control unit 91 outputs a credit sound from the first sheet. After executing S40 as the next step of S36 and S37, by executing the corresponding processing of S38 or S39, the credit command indicating the current value after the addition by S40 as the credit counter value is output to S38. Or you may make it set in S39. Also, at the time of the second replay winning, since a specified number of bets is set after the release of the rip freeze, in S39, a command for outputting the specified number of BET sounds as a credit command (with BET sound) is issued. It may be set so that a specified number of BET sounds are output.

  In S41, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 50, which is the upper limit. If the value of the credit counter is not 50, the process returns to S22, and if the value of the credit counter is 50, the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 in S42, and the process returns to S22.

  In S45, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start switch 7 has been detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating the rising of the start switch 7 has been set. Further, since the rising edge is set only when any of the switches is turned on and all the switches are turned off, in S45, the rising edge is determined in addition to whether or not any of the switches is turned on. It is also determined whether or not this switch is OFF.

  If it is determined in S45 that the operation of the start switch 7 has not been detected, or if the start switch 7 has been operated and other switches have been operated, the process proceeds to S50, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid. If it has been detected, the process proceeds to S46, where the rising edge is cleared. In S47, the specified number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is referred to, and whether the value of the BET counter is the specified number, that is, whether the bet number serving as a game start condition is set or not is determined. Is determined.

  If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number in S47, the process returns to S22. If the value of the BET counter is the specified number, the flow proceeds to S48 in which the insertion impossible flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 and the flow path switching solenoid is set. 30 is set to the off state, the insertion of new medals is prohibited by using the medal flow path as the path on the medal payout exit 9 side, and the setting at the start of the game is performed in S49. As a result, a medal is not accepted even if a medal is inserted until the setting before waiting for insertion is made in S21 in the BET processing after the next game after the game is started, and the medal payout exit 9 Will be paid out. Then, after S49, the BET process ends, and the process proceeds to Sd2 in FIG.

In S50, it is determined whether or not the operation of the single BET switch 5 has been detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating the rising of the single BET switch 5 has been set. If the operation of the single BET switch 5 is not detected in S50, the process proceeds to S51, and if the operation of the single BET switch 5 is detected, the process proceeds to S65 of FIG. 41 to clear the rising edge.

  In S66, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the specified number by referring to the specified number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in S66, the process returns to S22. If the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined in S67 whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0. If the value of the credit counter is 0 in S67, the process returns to S22. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in S67, in B68, a BET command indicating that the bet amount is added by 1 and that a BET sound is output by the sub-control unit 91 (BET sound exists). Is set in the buffer for normal command transmission. In S69, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1, and in S70, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1, and the process returns to S22. The BET command set in S68 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main). Thus, when the bet amount is set by operating the single BET switch 5, the sub control unit 91 outputs a BET sound. After the second replay prize, if YES is determined in S66, the same determination as S37 is performed, and if the specified number of BET sounds are not output, the same processing as S39 is performed. , BET sound may be output.

  In S51, it is determined whether or not the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 has been detected, that is, whether or not the rising edge indicating the rising of the MAXBET switch 6 has been set. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 has not been detected in S51, the process proceeds to S52. If the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 has been detected, the process proceeds to S75 in FIG. 41 to clear the rising edge.

  In S76, it is determined whether or not the value of the BET counter is the specified number by referring to the specified number of bets set in the RAM of the main control unit 41. If the value of the BET counter is the specified number in S76, the process proceeds to S80, and if the value of the BET counter is not the specified number, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is 0 in S77. If the value of the credit counter is 0 in S77, the process proceeds to S80. If the value of the credit counter is not 0 in S77, the value of the credit counter is decremented by 1 in S78, the value of the BET counter is incremented by 1 in S79, and the process returns to S76.

  In S80, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has been added. If the BET counter has not been added, the process returns to S22. When the BET counter is incremented in S80, the increment includes not only the increment in S79 but also the increment in S14 after the rip freeze is released by operating the MAXBET switch 6. On the other hand, if the BET counter has been added, the BET command (BET sound) indicating that the bet amount has been added by the number added in S81 and that the BET sound has been output by the sub-control unit 91 to output the BET sound. Yes) is set in the normal command transmission buffer, and the flow advances to S22. The BET command set in S81 is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main). Thus, when the bet amount is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6, the BET sound is output on the sub-control unit 91 side by the set bet amount.

  In S52, it is determined whether or not the operation of the settlement switch 10 has been detected, that is, whether or not a rising edge indicating the rising of the settlement switch 10 has been set. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is not detected in S52, the process returns to S22. If the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected, the process proceeds to S53 to clear the rising edge. In S54, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game based on whether or not the replay game flag is set in the RAM of the main control unit 41.

  If it is not determined in S54 that the game is a replay game, it is determined in S56 whether or not the value of the BET counter is 0. (Ie, returning the medals used for setting the bet amount and setting the value of the BET counter to 0), starting the payout of the medals and adjusting the bet amount. Is performed to set a payout start command for notifying the bet amount in the normal command transmission buffer. After the bet amount settlement process in S57, the insertion impossible flag set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is cleared in S58, and the process returns to S22. As a result, when the bet amount is adjusted by operating the adjustment switch 10 in a state where the bet amount is set, not after the replay winning, the sub-control unit 91 displays that the bet amount is being adjusted. At the same time, a sound corresponding to the bet amount settlement is output.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the game is a replay game, or if it is determined in S56 that the value of the BET counter is 0, the hopper motor 34 is driven in S59 to store the value stored in the credit counter. Control for paying out medals for minutes (that is, control for returning medals stored as credits and setting the value of the credit counter to 0) is performed, and the start of payout of medals is notified, and the credit settlement in the replay game is performed. A bet amount adjustment process is performed to set a payout start command in the normal command transmission buffer for notifying whether there is a credit or a credit adjustment when the bet amount is not set. After the bet amount settlement process in S57, the insertion impossible flag set in the RAM of the main control unit 41 is cleared in S58, and the process returns to S22. Thereby, when the settlement is performed by operating the settlement switch 10 in the replay winning, only the credit settlement is performed without performing the bet amount settlement, and the sub-control unit 91 side performs the credit after the replay winning. The fact that the settlement is in progress is displayed, and a sound corresponding to the credit settlement after the replay winning is output. Further, when the settlement is performed by operating the settlement switch 10 when the value of the BET counter is 0, the sub-control unit 91 side indicates that the credit settlement is being performed when the value of the BET counter is 0. While being displayed, a sound corresponding to credit settlement when the value of the BET counter is 0 is output.

[Rip freeze processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the rip freeze process executed by the main control unit 41 in S13 of the BET process. The re-freeze process is performed when it is determined that the game is a replay game, that is, after a replay winning in the previous game. In S85, it is determined whether or not the replay winning in the previous game was the second replay of Bell Lips 1 to 5. If it is determined that they are not Bell rips 1 to 5, the rip freeze process is terminated without generating a freeze.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that any one of Bell Lips 1 to 5 is determined, YES is determined in any of S89 to S92, and the timing for setting the bet amount by the replay winning and the start switch 7 are determined until the freeze release condition is satisfied. A process is performed to generate a freeze (rip freeze) that delays the timing of validating. In S86, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter is the upper limit value of 50. When it is determined in S86 that the value is not the upper limit value, credit can be added. Therefore, in S87, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, and medals can be inserted by using the flow path of medals as a path on the hopper tank side. State. In S88, a process for turning on the insertion request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 for the player is performed. Thereby, in particular, MAXBET operation, medal insertion, and the like can be promoted.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S86 that the value of the credit counter is 50, which is the upper limit, credit addition is not possible, and the process proceeds to step S89 without performing the process of step S87 or the like. This prevents the inserted medals from flowing down to the hopper tank side even though the credit counter is 50, while preventing the medals from causing a problem such as neither credit addition nor bet amount addition. Can be.

  In S89, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the rip freeze. When it is determined in S89 that the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the rip freeze, the rip freeze release condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in S89 that the predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of the rip freeze, in S90, it is determined whether or not a MAXBET operation has been performed by the player using the MAXBET switch 6. When it is determined in S90 that the MAXBET operation has been performed by the player, the rip freeze release condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in S90 that there is no MAXBET operation by the player, in S91, the medal inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 is provided with the inserted medal sensor 31 disposed closer to the hopper tank 34a than the flow path switching solenoid 30. Among the plurality of sensors, it is determined whether or not the sensor disposed at the most upstream side (that is, a sensor capable of detecting inserted medals first (this sensor is also hereinafter referred to as a specific sensor)) is detected. The passage of the medal is detected by the specific sensor when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on in S87. When it is determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, the refreeze release condition is satisfied. Even when it is determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, the inserted medal has not yet been detected by another sensor, and the detection result of the inserted medal sensor 31 is not an appropriate detection result. No flags are set.

  When it is not determined in S91 that a medal has been inserted, it is determined in S92 whether or not the player has performed a credit settlement operation using the settlement switch 10. When it is determined in S92 that a credit settlement operation has been performed by the player, the refrigeration release condition is satisfied. Further, after the freeze is released by the credit settlement operation, YES is determined in S52 of FIG. 40 and the process proceeds to S59, so that the credit settlement process is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S92 that there is no credit settlement operation by the player, the process proceeds to S89.

  After the freeze release condition is satisfied, in step S93, when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is in the on state, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the rip freeze processing ends. In the rip freeze process, the process of S93 is performed. Thereby, for example, even if a rip freeze occurs when the credit counter is 49 and a plurality of medals are inserted at a stretch, the freeze release condition is satisfied by detecting the first one of the medals by the specific sensor. Immediately after that, the flow path switching solenoid is turned off in S93, and after the re-freeze processing is terminated, the first medal is further detected by another sensor, and the detection result by the inserted medal sensor 31 is appropriate. When the insertion medal flag is set as the detection result, YES is determined in S30 of FIG. 40, the credit counter is updated to 50 in S40, and YES is determined in S19 of FIG. 39, and the insertion impossible flag is set in S20. Since the flow path switching solenoid is turned off, the second and subsequent medals of the plurality of medals are It is discharged from Le payout opening 9. The plurality of sensors included in the inserted medal sensor 31 are, when a plurality of medals are inserted at a stretch, the first medal is detected by the specific sensor and then detected by another sensor, and the detection result by the inserted medal sensor 31 is obtained. Is shorter than the time required from when the first medal is detected by the specific sensor to when the second medal reaches the flow path switching solenoid 30. Are arranged as follows. Therefore, when the credit reaches 50 by inserting the first medal, the flow path switching solenoid is always turned off when the second and subsequent medals reach the flow path switching solenoid 30 so that the two medals are turned off. The medals after the first eye can be paid out from the medal payout exit 9. Thus, it is possible to prevent a problem that credits are not added or returned even though the medal is inserted.

  On the other hand, when the credit counter is less than 49 and a rip freeze occurs and a plurality of medals are inserted at a stretch, the first one of the medals is detected by the specific sensor, and the freeze release condition is satisfied. Thereafter, the flow path switching solenoid is immediately turned off in S93, but immediately after that, NO is determined in S19 in FIG. 39 and the setting before the injection wait is performed in S21, and the flow path switching solenoid is turned on. Since the on state is maintained until the credit reaches the credit 50, the second and subsequent medals of the plurality of medals are also captured (until the credit 50 is reached) and added to the credit. Thereby, the convenience when a medal is inserted during the rip freeze can be improved.

[Example of timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed]
Next, the timing at which the insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after the end of the game will be described. FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (d) are diagrams for explaining an example of the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is permitted after the game is completed by executing the BET processing shown in FIGS. 39 to 41. It is.

  FIG. 43 (a) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is permitted after no medal payout without winning a small role. If the small winning combination has not been generated, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the processing of S8 in FIG. 11, the processing of S1 for the next game, and the processing of S10 to S12 in FIG. After the processing is executed, the processing after S21 is executed, so that insertion of a medal or settlement is allowed as shown in FIG. 43 (a).

  FIG. 43 (b) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after a small win and a medal payout. If a small winning combination has occurred, the game ends after the payout is performed, and thereafter, the processing of S8 in FIG. 11, the processing of S1 for the next game, and the processing of S10 to S12 in FIG. After the processing is executed, the processing after S21 is executed, so that insertion of a medal or settlement is allowed as shown in FIG. 43 (b).

  FIG. 43 (c) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after a normal lip winning. When a normal lip prize has occurred, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the processing of S8 in FIG. 11, the processing of S1 for the next game, and the processing of S10 to S12 in FIG. In addition to the processing, after the bet amount setting is completed, and after it is determined in S19 that credit is possible, the processing of S21 and thereafter is executed, as shown in FIG. 43 (c). Insertion or settlement of medals is allowed.

  FIG. 43 (d) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after a Belllip winning. If a bell lip has been won, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the processing of S8 in FIG. 11, the processing of S1 for the next game, and the processing of S10 to S12 in FIG. Is executed, the rip freeze process shown in FIG. 42 is executed, and the rip freeze is controlled until the rip freeze release condition is satisfied. During this time, as shown in S87 of FIG. 42, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, permitting the insertion of medals for releasing the freeze, the credit settlement operation for releasing the freeze, and the MAXBET operation. Is also allowed. When the re-freeze release condition is satisfied, after the bet amount setting is completed, it is determined in step S19 of FIG. 39 that credit is possible, and then the processing of step S21 and subsequent steps is executed to thereby be shown in FIG. 43 (d). As described above, insertion or settlement of a normal medal is allowed.

  During Rip-freeze, medals for releasing the freeze and credit settlement operations are allowed.Rip-freeze is released in conjunction with the medal insertion and credit settlement operations during the rip freeze, and normal medals are set after the bet amount is set. Is entered or settled. Even if the credit counter value has already reached 50 even during the rip freeze, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is not turned on in S87 of FIG. 42. It will be accepted later.

[Regarding the timing of allowance / payment after replay winning]
In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 (c) and (d), an example in which the insertion (credit) / payment is allowed after the replay winning is when the automatic BET due to the replay winning is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the insertion (credit) / payment is allowed after the replay prize may be performed when the automatic BET due to the replay prize is started (or started).

[Modified example of timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed]
FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after a replay winning. FIG. 44 (a) shows that when a normal lip prize has occurred, the game is ended without payout, and thereafter, the processing of S8 in FIG. 11, the processing of S1 for the next game, After the processing of S10 to S13 in FIG. 39 is performed, the processing of automatic BET (S14, S15) is started. In other words, after the processing of S10 to S13 in FIG. 39 is performed, the start of the automatic BET processing (S14, S15) is determined, so it can be said that the automatic BET processing is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), when automatic BET processing is started (or started), insertion or settlement of medals may be allowed.

  As a first example, for example, when the determination in S12 is YES and the processing in S13 ends, the same processing as in S19 is performed to determine whether or not the credit counter value is 50, and then, The automatic BET processing (the same processing as S14 and S15) is started, and after it is determined that the value of the credit counter is not 50, the completion of the automatic BET processing started thereafter is waited for. Alternatively, the credit may be added when a medal inserted afterwards is detected after performing the same processing as in S21, and the credit may be adjusted when an operation on the adjustment switch 10 is detected. On the other hand, after performing the same processing as S19 and determining that the value of the credit counter is 50, the same processing as the processing after S20 may be performed. In the first example, the re-freezing process may be performed, for example, at a timing when the bet amount setting is started.

  As a second example, for example, it is possible to execute an interrupt process for inserting or adjusting a medal, and when it is determined that the value of the credit counter in the first example is not 50, or when the value of the credit counter is Between the time when the processing corresponding to the first time S14 is executed after it is determined that it is not 50 and the start of the game, the interruption of the interruption processing is permitted, and the interruption is performed every predetermined period (2 msec). When the automatic BET processing is started (or started), the insertion or settlement of medals may be allowed.

  Even in the case of this configuration, even if the medal is inserted after the replay winning is generated and before the replay game is started (reel rotation starts), the bet amount due to the replay winning is obtained. If the medal is detected after the setting (automatic BET) is started, credits can be added according to the detection of the medal. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the credit addition after the replay winning has occurred from being performed before the start of the bet amount setting. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the occurrence of the replay winning without giving a sense of incongruity. In addition, the replay function itself of giving a replay game (one game) instead of paying out medals is maintained to maintain the significance of the replay, while credits are set according to the settlement operation even after the replay winning. By making the payout possible, the convenience of the player after the replay winning can be further improved.

  FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram for explaining the timing at which insertion or settlement of medals is allowed after a Belllip winning. If a bell lip has been won, the game ends without payout, and thereafter, the processing of S8 in FIG. 11, the processing of S1 for the next game, and the processing of S10 to S12 in FIG. Is performed, the rip freeze process shown in FIG. 42 is executed, and the rip freeze is controlled until the rip freeze release condition is satisfied. During this time, as shown in S87 of FIG. 42, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned on, permitting the insertion of medals for releasing the freeze, the credit settlement operation for releasing the freeze, and the MAXBET operation. Is also allowed. When the refreeze release condition is satisfied, bet amount setting is started, and insertion or settlement of medals is allowed as shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the normal lip winning is achieved, as shown in FIG. 44A, when the processing of the automatic BET is started (or started), the insertion or the settlement of the medal is allowed, and the bell lip is won. When a prize is won, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), a bell lip freeze is generated, and after the freeze release condition is satisfied and the automatic BET processing is started (or started), the medal of the medals is removed. Input or settlement may be allowed. In this case, in order to prevent the notification of the bet and the notification of the credit addition from being performed at the same time, when automatic BET processing is started (or started), insertion of medals or Although the settlement is allowed, the notification that the credit has been added by inserting the medals may be always performed after the notification that the automatic BET has been made. Further, in the above-described embodiment, similarly, the notification that credit has been added by the medal inserted for canceling the rip freeze may be always performed after the notification that the automatic BET has been issued. Good.

  Note that, even when the timing at which the insertion (credit) is allowed after the replay winning is performed when the automatic BET by the replay winning is started, the timing at which the settlement is allowed after the replay winning is automatically determined by the replay winning. You may make it the time of completion of BET.

  In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 43 (c) and (d) and FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), the timing at which the insertion (credit) / payment is allowed after the replay wins. Although an example has been described in which the automatic BET is started or completed due to the replay winning, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the automatic BET is started or completed due to the replay winning may be used. The predetermined condition may be satisfied when a predetermined time elapses, or may be satisfied when a predetermined process ends. As an example in which the predetermined condition is satisfied after the predetermined time has elapsed after the completion of the automatic BET due to the replay winning, for example, the BET command (with BET sound) set in S17 of FIG. When the average time required to complete the output of the third bet sound based on the command is set to time A, the condition is satisfied when the predetermined condition is determined to be YES in S15 and the time A has elapsed. When the average time required for the BET command (no bet sound) set in S18 of FIG. 39 to be output to the sub-control unit 91 and received is B, The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the time B has elapsed since the determination of S15 is YES. After the determination of S15 is YES, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the process may shift to S21.

  In the above-described embodiment, the types of replay include a normal lip of a first replay as a specific replay display result as a specific combination, and a bell lip of a second replay as a non-specific replay display result as a non-specific combination. Although the example in which is provided is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of replay may be such that the non-specific replay display result is not provided and only the specific replay display result is provided. Contrary to this, the specific re-game display result may not be provided and only the non-specific re-game display result may be provided.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which insertion after a replay winning is permitted regardless of the type of replay. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and insertion after a replay winning is permitted according to the type of replay. You may comprise so that it may be. For example, after the first replay winning as a specific replay display result as a specific combination, insertion is not allowed, whereas only after the second replay winning as a non-specific replay displaying result as a non-specific combination. The input may be allowed. That is, the insertion may be allowed only when it is difficult to notice that the re-game display result has been derived, so that the convenience may be improved without bothering the player.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the settlement after the replay winning is allowed regardless of the type of the replay has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the settlement after the replay winning is allowed according to the type of the replay. You may comprise so that it may be. For example, the settlement is not allowed after the first replay winning as a specific replay display result as a specific combination, whereas only after the second replay winning as a non-specific replay display result as a non-specific combination. Payment may be allowed. That is, the settlement may be allowed only when it is difficult to notice that the re-game display result has been derived, and the convenience may be improved without bothering the player.

  Then, in the modified example 3 configured as described above, the counting of the net number of medals is configured to end when a predetermined period (for example, 50 games) has elapsed after the end of the AT. Then, when the net number of medals reaches the specified number and the net number of increase is notified by the notification effect, the net increase of the number of medals thereafter decreases, and when the net number of medals reaches the predetermined number again, the notification effect is executed. Configure to regulate. As a result, while the AT ends and the net increase decreases, the net increase again falls below the prescribed number, but the AT is controlled again by the AT before the number of games after the AT reaches 50 games, and the net increase again becomes the prescribed number. , Etc., it is possible to prevent the player from impressing that the number of medals has decreased after the end of the AT.

  Further, in the third modification, when the execution of the specific effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the specific effect is executed without executing the notification effect, and thereafter, the notification effect is executed when a medal is paid out. Such a configuration is also possible. By this, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow that the notification effect is executed when the payout of the medal occurs is not collapsed, so that the player proceeds with the game so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Can be.

  Further, in the third modification, when the execution of the specific effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the notification effect is executed without executing the specific effect, and thereafter, when the net increase number reaches a predetermined number, the continuous notification effect is performed. Can also be configured to execute As a result, even if the execution time of the specific effect is changed, the flow of executing the specific effect when the net increase number reaches the predetermined number does not collapse, so that the game is performed so that the player does not feel uncomfortable can do.

[Modification 5]
In the fifth modification, a case will be described in which the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment to the third embodiment is replaced with a pachinko gaming machine 700.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 700, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 32 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 700.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the pachinko gaming machine 700 includes an outer frame formed in a vertically elongated rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 700 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 702 provided in the game frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame that can be freely opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components (except for a game board 706 described later) attached thereto. It is.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 702, there is a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 703. On the upper surface of the hit ball supply tray 703, a chance button 7111 which is operated when a specific effect is executed in the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) is provided. The chance button 7111 corresponds to the effect switch 56 of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  Selection buttons 112A and 7112B that are operated when selecting various setting items and the like are provided on the front surface of the hit ball supply tray 703 near the chance button 7111. The selection buttons 7112A and 7112B correspond to the stop switches 8L and 8R at the time of displaying each screen of the slot machine 1 described in the first embodiment.

  Below the hitting ball supply tray 703, a surplus ball receiving tray 704 for storing game balls as game media that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 703, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 705 for firing a hitting ball (game ball). Is provided. A game board 706 (see FIG. 45) is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 702. Note that the game board 706 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the board and various parts attached to the plate-like body. On the front surface of the game board 706, there is formed a game area 707 in which a hit game ball can flow down. In the game area 707, a number of nails for guiding game balls are planted.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 707, an effect display device 709 constituted by a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. The effect display device 709 performs a variable display (decorative display, update display, or cyclic display) of an effect symbol (decorative symbol) synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The fluctuation display of the effect symbols is executed in various fluctuation modes such as a scroll display and an on-the-fly switching display. The effect display device 709 corresponds to a variable display device that performs a variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each of them. In the effect display device 709, an effect symbol display area for displaying an effect symbol on the display screen is provided, and in the effect symbol display area, for example, three (left, middle, and right) (multiple) ) Has a symbol display area as a display area for variably displaying the effect symbols. Each of these three effect symbols is an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each of them. The effect display device 709 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 708a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 709 to execute an effect display along with the variation display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed on the symbol display 708b, the effect display is performed by the effect display device in accordance with the variation display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  On the left side of the effect display device 709 on the game board 706, a first special symbol display (first variable display means) 708a for variably displaying the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each of them is provided. Is provided. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 708a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 708a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. On the right side of the effect display device 709 on the game board 706, a second special symbol display (second variable display means) 708b for variably displaying a second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided. Is provided. The second special symbol display 708b is realized by a simple and small display capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 708b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. In the present embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 708a and the second special symbol display 708b may each be configured to, for example, variably display a number from 00 to 99 (or a two-digit symbol).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 708a and the second special symbol indicator 708b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator. For the first special symbol, the variable display is executed on the condition that the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed on the second special symbol display 708b. For the second special symbol, the variable display is executed on condition that the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed on the first special symbol display 708a. That is, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed without being variably displayed at the same time.

  In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 713 or the second starting winning opening). 714), the variable display start condition (for example, the case where the number of stored memories is not 0, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed, and When the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the prize means that the game ball has passed through an area, such as a winning opening, which is predetermined as a prize area (the game ball has entered). Deriving and displaying a display result means that a symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

  In the following description, the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 713 may be referred to as first start winning, and the case that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 714 may be referred to as second start winning. There are cases. The data relating to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as the hold storage data which is the right to perform the variable display of the special symbol until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of a RAM 755 of a game control microcomputer 7560 described later. Up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first start prize holding storage data is stored as the first hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer, and the second start prize hold storage data is stored in a predetermined number (for example, 4). ) Is stored in the second hold storage buffer as the second hold storage data with the upper limit of the number.

  The pachinko gaming machine 700 is provided with a hit ball launching device that drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a hit ball operation handle 705 and shoots a game ball to the game area 707 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. Have been. A game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 707 through a hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 707, and then descends from the game area 707. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 713 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 713a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 708a starts the variable display (fluctuation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). Is done. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the first starting winning opening 713. Unless the change display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of reserved storages is increased by one on the condition that the first number of reserved storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 714 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 714a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display 708b starts the variable display of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). That is, the change display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the second starting winning opening 714. Unless the variation display of the second special symbol can be started, the second number of reserved storages is increased by one on the condition that the second number of reserved storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 709 is used for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b. The effect symbol (decorative symbol) as the symbol for (for) is changed and displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Further, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start time and the end time of the variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same), and the period of the variable display is substantially the same (may be the same). When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 708b, the effect display device 709 reminds the user of the big hit. Is stopped and displayed. The above-described first special symbol display 708a, second special symbol display 708b, and effect display device 709 are variable display devices that perform variable display of identification information and derive and display display results, and are used as a variable display unit. Can be

  In the effect display device 709, when changing display is started, for example, all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols start changing display. Then, the left, middle, and right effect symbols displayed in a fluctuating manner basically stop in a predetermined order (for example, a predetermined order such as a left effect symbol, a right effect symbol, and a medium effect symbol). When a predetermined fluctuation time elapses from the start of the fluctuation display, all the left, middle, and right effect symbols stop and the display result is determined. The order in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols stop may be an order other than the order of the left, right, and middle symbols. Further, the left, middle and right effect symbols may be stopped at the same time.

  Below the effect display device 709, a winning device having a first start winning opening 713 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning port 713 is guided to the back of the game board 706, and is detected by the first start port switch 713a.

In addition, below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 713, a variable winning ball apparatus (electric tulip) having the second starting winning port 714 (second starting port) in which game balls can be won. ) 715 are provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning port 714 is guided to the back of the game board 706, and is detected by the second start port switch 714a. The variable winning ball device 715 is opened by a solenoid 716. When the variable prize ball device 715 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second start prize port 714 (the start prize can be easily won), which is in an advantageous state for the player. When the variable winning prize ball device 715 is in the open state, a game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 714 than in the first starting winning opening 713. When the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 714. In the state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win). Thus, the state in which the variable winning prize ball device 715 is in the closed state may be a state in which the gaming ball does not easily win or does not win the second starting winning opening 714. Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 713 and the second starting winning opening 714 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 715 is controlled to be in an open state, a game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 715 is extremely easy to win the second starting winning opening 714. Although the first start winning opening 713 is provided immediately below the effect display device 709, the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 709 and the first start winning opening 713 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening 713 is provided. The arrangement of nails around the first starting winning opening 713 makes it difficult for the game balls to be guided to the first starting winning opening 713, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 714. May be made higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 713.

  Below the first special symbol display 708a, the number of valid winning balls in the first starting winning opening 713, that is, the first retained memory number (the retained memory is also referred to as a starting memory or a starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 718a including two displays (for example, LEDs) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 718a increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 708a is started, the number of the lighted displays is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 708b, a second special symbol hold composed of four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls in the second starting winning opening 714, that is, the second number of stored memories. A storage display 718b is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 718b increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 708b is started, the number of the lighted displays is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 709 is provided with a first hold storage display section 718c for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display section 718d for displaying the second hold storage number. (Each display area is provided). Note that an area (summed storage display unit) for displaying the total number (summed suspended storage count) that is the sum of the first suspended storage count and the second suspended storage count may be provided. In this way, by providing the total suspension storage display unit for displaying the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the start condition of the variable display.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, a variable winning ball device 715 that opens and closes only the second starting winning opening 714 is provided. A configuration in which a variable winning ball device that opens and closes any of the winning ports 714 may be provided.

  During the effect display device 709, the reach state may occur during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol. Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 709 constitute a part of the combination of the big hit symbols, the variation of the effect symbols which are not yet stopped and displayed continues. Display state, or a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols are synchronously fluctuating while forming all or a part of the combination of the big hit symbols. In other words, “reach” refers to a state in which the identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In the present embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach forming symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is a reach effect display (reach effect). Also, at the time of the reach, an unusual effect may be performed by a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Also, at the time of the reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design or the like)) is displayed, or a display mode (for example, a color or the like) of a background image of the effect display device 709 is displayed. ) May change. This change in the character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. Some reach is set so that a big hit is likely to occur when it appears, compared to a normal reach (normal reach), and the reliability of the big hit is high. Such special (specific) reach is called super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 45, a special variable winning ball device 720 is provided below the variable winning ball device 715. The special variable prize ball device 720 includes an opening / closing plate, and can be changed between an open state (first state) in which game balls can be won and a closed state (second state) in which game balls cannot be won. It is. In the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 720 may be configured such that it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for game balls to win). As described above, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is in the closed state may be a state in which a game ball is difficult to win or does not win the special variable winning ball device 720.

  The special variable winning ball device 720 is a solenoid in a specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a or the second special symbol display 708b. By controlling the open / close plate to be in the open state by 721, the big winning opening that is a winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 723.

  In the big hit game state, the repetition continuation control in which the special variable winning ball device 720 repeats the open state and the closed state is performed. In the repetition continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened is called a round. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of big hits are provided, and when it is determined that a big hit is made, one of the big hit types is selected. In this embodiment, the control example in which the special variable prize ball device 720 is opened only once in one round is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Control for opening the device 720 may be performed.

  An ordinary symbol display 710 (not shown) is provided below the effect display device 709. The ordinary symbol display 710 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “O” and “X”) called ordinary symbols. When a game ball passes through the gate 732 and is detected by the gate switch 732a, a variation display of the display of the ordinary symbol display 710 is started. In the present embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (the symbols become visible when lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 710 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol “○”), the variable winning ball device 715 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 715 is a state in which the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, which is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening 714). Changes to

  In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 710, an ordinary symbol hold storage display 741 having four displays (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls passing through the gate 732 is provided. Each time a game ball passes through the gate 732, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 732a, the normal symbol hold storage display 741 increases the number of lighted displays by one. Then, each time the variable display of the ordinary symbol display 710 is started, the number of the lighted display is reduced by one. The upper limit value of the number of ordinary symbols on-hold storage is four, and the ordinary symbol on-hold storage indicator 741 turns on the display with these four as the upper limit values.

  On the left and right sides of the game area 707 of the game board 706, decoration LEDs 725 blinking and displayed during the game are provided, and a lower portion has an out port 726 for receiving a hit ball which has not won. In addition, two speakers 727R and 727L that emit a sound effect or a sound as a predetermined sound output are provided at the upper left and right sides outside the game area 707. A top frame LED 728a, a left frame LED 728b, and a right frame LED 728c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer periphery, the outer left portion, and the outer right portion of the game area 707. For example, the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c are associated displays in a pseudo-run effect as a repetitive change pattern (each re-change period (including the first change period) during one change period). When an effect is performed, such as an effect is performed, blinking control is performed.

  The repetitive variation pattern refers to a variation pattern in which a specific effect display is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times after the start of the change display of the special symbol and the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed, and then a reach effect is executed. . Here, the specific effect display is, for example, an effect display such as an effect display that changes again. If the effect display can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times, for example, an effect display other than the re-change display such as a notice display is used. There may be. In the present embodiment, as an example of the repetition fluctuation pattern, an example will be described in which a pseudo repetition fluctuation pattern that can be repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times with re-variation as a specific effect display is used. Here, the pseudo-run is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of changes corresponding to a plurality of hold memories are continuously performed, although the change is originally a single change corresponding to one hold memory. Abbreviation for pseudo-continuous fluctuation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is used to show as if a plurality of symbols of variable display (variable display) have been executed for one start winning within a variable time determined for one start winning. Indicates a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are performed a predetermined number of times for all symbol rows (left, middle, right). For example, the greater the number of times of repeated execution of re-variation (also referred to as the number of pseudo-continuous re-variations), the greater the reliability of a big hit (the big hit for all selection ratios including the time of a big hit and the time of a miss). The degree of the rate selected at that time and the degree of the rate of a big hit, that is, the degree of reliability of the big hit) are increased. More specifically, the ratio selected when a jackpot is determined increases. In the pseudo-run variation pattern, a combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 709 is referred to as a combination of temporarily stopped symbols. The combination of the temporary stop symbols is determined to be one of the pseudo consecutive chances out of a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter referred to as pseudo consecutive chances) composed of combinations of symbols other than the combination of the big hit symbols. In addition, when the pseudo-run variation is executed, a certain reach effect may be executed in the final reach state.

  In addition, near the left frame LED 728b, there is provided a prize ball LED 751 that lights up when there is a remaining prize ball, and near the right frame LED 728c, there is provided a ball out LED 752 that lights up when the supply ball runs out. . The top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, the right frame LED 728c, and the decoration LED 725 are examples of a luminous body for effect provided in the pachinko gaming machine 700. Note that, in addition to the various LEDs for effects (for decoration) described above, LEDs and lamps for effects are provided. In addition, a prepaid card unit that enables lending of a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 700.

  FIG. 46 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of a main board (game control board) 731. FIG. 33 also shows a payout control board 737, an effect control board 780, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 46, a game control microcomputer 7560 that controls the pachinko gaming machine 700 according to a program is mounted on the main board 731. The game control microcomputer 7560 includes a ROM 754 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 755 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 756 and an I / O 757 for performing control operations according to the program. In the present embodiment, the ROM 754 and the RAM 755 are built in the microcomputer 7560 for game control. That is, the game control microcomputer 7560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the RAM 755 in addition to the CPU 756, and the ROM 754 may be external or internal. Also, the I / O 757 may be external. The game control microcomputer 7560 further includes a random number circuit 7503 for generating a hardware random number (a random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 7560, since the CPU 756 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 754, the execution (or processing) by the game control microcomputer 7560 (or CPU 756) is hereinafter referred to. Specifically, the CPU 756 executes control according to a program. The same applies to the microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 731.

  The random number circuit 7503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol change display. The random number circuit 7503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value based on the fact that the winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data.

  The random number circuit 7503 includes a selection setting function of a numerical data update range (selection setting function of an initial value and an upper limit value selection setting function), a selection setting function of a numerical data update rule, and a numerical data update rule. It has various functions such as a selection switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 7560 (an ID number assigned to a different numerical value for each product of the game control microcomputer 7560) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 754. The obtained numerical data is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 7503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 7560 reads the numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 7503 when the first starting port switch 713a or the second starting port switch 714a receives a start prize, and starts changing the special symbol and the effect symbol. At times, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, to make a big hit. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the game state is shifted to a big hit game state as a specific game state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 755 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 755 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply capacitor). In particular, at least the game state, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the game control microcomputer 7560 (such as the value of the special symbol process flag and the value of each pending storage counter) and the data indicating the number of outstanding payout balls are stored in the backup RAM. Is stored in The data according to the control state by the game control microcomputer 7560 is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. is there. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the entire power of the RAM 755 is backed up.

  A reset signal from a power supply board is input to a reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 7560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal to be supplied to the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal goes high, the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like enter an operable state, and when the reset signal goes low the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like enter an operation stop state. Therefore, during the period when the reset signal is at the high level, an allowance signal allowing the operation of the game control microcomputer 7560 and the like is output, and during the period when the reset signal is at the low level, the game control microcomputer This means that the operation stop signal for stopping the operation such as 7560 has been output. The reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric components is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560. That is, the power supply board monitors a voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V or DC5V) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). Power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that the power-off signal is detected. A clear signal indicating that a clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM has been operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 7560.

  In addition, an input driver circuit for providing detection signals from the gate switch 732a, the first starting port switch 713a, the second starting port switch 714a, the count switch 723, the general winning port switch 711, and the collecting passage sensor 712 to the game control microcomputer 7560. 758 is also mounted on the main board 731. Upon receiving the detection signals from the various switches, the main board 731 sends a prize ball signal to the payout control board 737 to execute the payout of the prize balls according to the various switches. Upon receiving the prize ball signal, the payout control board 737 drives the ball payout device 797 to pay out a prize ball according to the prize ball signal.

  The general winning opening switch 711 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 706, and detects, for example, a game ball that has entered a general winning opening (not shown) that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. Switch. Based on the detection of the game balls by the general winning opening switch 711, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The collection passage sensor 712 is a transmission type optical sensor that is installed at a predetermined position of a common passage through which all the game balls collected by the pachinko gaming machine 700 pass, and detects the passage of the game balls.

  An output circuit 759 for driving a solenoid 716 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 715 and a solenoid 721 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 720 forming a special winning opening in accordance with a command from the microcomputer 7560 for game control are also mainly provided. It is mounted on a substrate 731. Further, an information output circuit for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit game state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 731.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control means (comprising an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 780 directs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 7560 via the relay board 777. The control command is received, and the display control of the effect display device 709 for variably displaying the effect symbols is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the operation signal from the chance button 7111 is input to the effect control board 780, and the effect and the determination operation on each screen are executed in accordance with the operation signal from the chance button 7111.

  In the present embodiment, operation signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B are input to the effect control board 780, and a selection operation is performed on each screen or the like according to the operation signals from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B.

  The effect control board 780 has an effect control microcomputer including an effect control CPU and a RAM. Note that the RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 780, the effect control CPU operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM, and receives a capture signal (effect control INT signal) from the main board 731 input via the relay board 777. ), An effect control command is received via the input driver and the input port. The effect control CPU causes a VDP (video display processor) to perform display control of the effect display device 709 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP for controlling display of the effect display device 709 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer is mounted on the effect control board 780. The VDP has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer, and maps the VRAM there. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 709.

  The effect control CPU reads necessary data from the character ROM according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores character image data displayed on the effect display device 709, specifically, a person, a character, a figure or a symbol (including effect designs) in advance. The effect control CPU outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP. The VDP executes display control based on data input from the effect control CPU. The effect control CPU executes the effect according to the operation signal input from the chance button 7111, and determines a selection item on each screen or the like. The effect control CPU selects a selection item on each screen or the like according to the operation signal input from the selection buttons 7112A and 7112B.

  The effect control board 780 is connected to a power supply circuit (not shown), and the effect control CPU of the effect control board 780 has a power supply monitoring function of monitoring that power is supplied from the power supply circuit. The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to an input driver (not shown) on the effect control board 780. The input driver allows the signal input from the relay board 777 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 780 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 780 to the relay board 777). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a means. Further, the effect control CPU outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 735 through an output port (not shown). The effect control CPU outputs sound number data to the audio output board 770 via the output port.

  In the lamp driver board 735, a signal for driving the LED is input to an LED driver (not shown) via an input driver (not shown). The LED driver supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 728a, the left frame LED 728b, and the right frame LED 728c. In addition, a drive signal is supplied to the decorative LED 725 provided on the game board 706 side. When a light-emitting body other than the LED is provided, a driving circuit (driver) for driving the light-emitting body is mounted on the lamp driver board 735.

  In the voice output board 770, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input driver. The voice synthesizing IC generates a voice or a sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs to the speakers 727R and 727L audio signals obtained by amplifying the output level of the audio synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume. The audio data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a group of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined time period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect symbol) in a time-series manner.

  In the pachinko machine 700 configured as described above, when a gaming ball wins in the special winning opening during the jackpot gaming state, the fact is notified. Further, a net increase obtained by subtracting the number of fired game balls from the number of paid out game balls is counted together with the start of the jackpot game state. When the net increase reaches a specified number (for example, 1000 shots, 2500 shots, 5000 shots, and 10000 shots) during the jackpot game state, the net increase number is specified without notifying that the gaming ball has won the big winning opening. Notify that the number has been reached.

  When the net increase reaches the specified number, a prize will be awarded to the special winning opening.By notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number, the player will be notified that the net increase has reached the specified number. It is possible to simultaneously recognize that a game ball has won a winning opening. In addition, by efficiently notifying only that the net addition number has reached the specified number, it is possible to further impress that the net addition number has reached the specified number.

  Also, in the above-described pachinko machine 700, when a gaming ball wins in the special winning opening during the jackpot gaming state, the effect is notified by the effect display device 709 and the speakers 727R and 727L. Further, when the net addition number reaches the specified number during the jackpot gaming state, the fact that the game ball has won the big winning opening is notified by the speakers 727R and 727L, and the effect display device indicates that the net addition number has reached the specified number. 709.

  Thereby, even when each of the winning at the large winning opening and the notification that the net increase has reached the specified number is notified, one notification can notify at the same timing without disturbing the other notification.

  Also, in the above-described pachinko machine 700, when a specific jackpot is won, the jackpot is controlled to a probability variation state in which the jackpot occurrence probability becomes higher than the normal gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. . Further, when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific round of the jackpot gaming state or during the jackpot gaming state, it is configured to notify whether or not the state is controlled to the probability fluctuation state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Then, when notifying only when the gaming ball has won the big winning opening during the jackpot gaming state, the effect is displayed by the effect display device 709 and the speakers 727R and 727L. In addition, when notifying only whether or not to be controlled to the probability fluctuation state, the notification is provided by the effect display device 709 and the speakers 727R and 727L. Furthermore, when a gaming ball is won in the special winning opening during the jackpot gaming state, a notification to that effect is given. A notification is made by the speakers 727R and 727L, and whether or not the state is controlled to the probability variation state is notified by the effect display device 709.

  Thereby, even when each of the winning at the big winning opening and the effect of being controlled to the probability variation state is notified, one notification can notify at the same timing without obstructing the other notification.

[Effects of First to Third Embodiments and Modifications 1 to 4]
In the first embodiment, the fact that the payout has occurred is notified, and when the payout occurs, when the net increase number reaches the specified number, the net increase number becomes the specified number without notifying that the payout has occurred. It notifies that it has reached (the part that performs the processing of Sq4 in FIG. 21).
Therefore, when the net increase reaches the specified number, a payout is also accompanied, so by notifying that the net increase has reached the specified number, the player has paid out together with the fact that the net increase has reached the specified number. Can be recognized at the same time. In addition, by efficiently notifying only that the net addition number has reached the specified number, it is possible to further impress that the net addition number has reached the specified number.

In the first embodiment, the first event is that a medal is paid out, and the second event is that the net increase reaches a specified number (the part for determining Sq1 and Sq3 in FIG. 21).
Therefore, it is possible to further impress the player to reach the prescribed number of the net increase regarding the payout of medals which is advantageous to the player.

In the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the net increase number has reached the specified number (the part performing the process of Sq4 in FIG. 21).
Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the prescribed number.

In the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net addition number does not reach the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred (the process of Ss5 in FIG. 23). When the payout occurs and the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies the fact that the net increase has reached the specified number, and notifies the speaker 53 and 54 that the payout has occurred. Notify (portion for performing the process of Ss4 in FIG. 23).
Therefore, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing other notifications.

In the second embodiment, when the payout occurs and the net increase reaches the specified number, the liquid crystal display 51 informs the user that the net increase has reached the specified number (the part performing the process of Ss4 in FIG. 23). ).
Therefore, it can be more impressed that the net increase has reached the prescribed number.

In the above-described second embodiment, the first event is that a medal is paid out, and the second event is that the net increase reaches a specified number (the part for determining Ss1 and Ss3 in FIG. 23).
Therefore, even when different events relating to the payout of medals that are advantageous to the player are reported to have occurred, it is possible to report at the same timing without disturbing one notification.

In the third embodiment, when the payout occurs and the number of AT games is not added, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred (the part performing the processing of St5 in FIG. 26). ), When the payout does not occur and the number of AT games is added, the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the number of AT games has been added (portion where the processing of St7 in FIG. 26 is performed), and the payout is performed. Occurs, and the number of AT games is added, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies that the number of AT games has been added, and the speakers 53 and 54 notify that the payout has occurred (St4 in FIG. 26). Part that performs processing).
Therefore, even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without disturbing other notifications.

In the third embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies the player of an additional number of AT games having a higher priority of notification to the player than the occurrence of the payout (the part performing the processing of St4 in FIG. 26).
Therefore, the number of AT games can be further impressed to be added.

In the first modification, when the number of games after the end of the AT reaches 50 games, the net increase number that has been counted up to that point is cleared, and the notification effect is performed again for the specified number once the notification effect has been performed. (In this example, when Sh4 in FIG. 28 is Y, the processing of Sh6 is not performed).
Therefore, for example, while the AT is completed and the net increase is decreased, and the net increase is less than the prescribed number, the AT is controlled again by the AT before the number of games after the AT reaches 50 games and the net increase is again the prescribed number. , Etc., it is possible to prevent the player from impressing that the number of medals has decreased after the end of the AT.

In the first modification, when the execution of the continuous effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the continuous effect is executed without executing the notification effect, and the notification effect is paid out again and the net increase reaches the specified number. (In this example, the processing of Sh6 is not performed when Sh5 is Y in FIG. 28 and the processing of Sh6 is performed when Sh5 is N in FIG. 28).
Therefore, even if the execution time of the notification effect is changed, the flow that the notification effect is executed when the payout of the medal occurs does not collapse, so that the game can be advanced so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. it can.

In the above second modification, when the execution of the additional effect and the execution of the notification effect overlap, the information effect is executed without executing the additional effect, and the additional effect is performed when the additional condition is satisfied and the additional lottery is performed. An effect is performed (in this example, a part for determining Sr5 in FIG. 31).
Therefore, even if the execution time of the additional effect is changed, the flow of the additional effect being executed when the additional condition is satisfied does not collapse, so that the player can proceed with the game without feeling uncomfortable. .

In the third modification, a continuous effect of an effect pattern of changing the number notification effect 502 for notifying the predetermined number to additional information effects 504 and 506 for notifying the number of added games is executed as a continuous winning notification effect (in this example, FIG. 38 (B) and FIG. 38 (C)).
Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the number of medal acquisitions and the number of added games than in a slot machine that does not notify the number of added games in an effect pattern that changes from the number information presentation effect to the continuous winning information effect. When the number of obtained medals from the start reaches the predetermined number, it is possible to effectively notify that the AT has been continuously won.

In the fourth modification, after the re-game display result is derived, the betting number stored in the betting number storage means is updated by the re-game derivation updating means to allow the next game to be started. When the game medium is detected by the detection means, the game value stored in the game value storage means is updated (in this example, S40 in FIG. 40. In addition to the processing in S10 to S12 in FIG. 39, Further, after the bet amount setting is completed and it is determined in step S19 that credit is possible, the processing is executed in and after step S21 (see FIG. 43 (c)).
Therefore, even after the re-game display result is derived, the game medium that has been inserted is detected after the bet amount is updated by the re-game derivation update unit and the next game can be started. By being a medium, the game value can be updated according to the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated before the bet amount is set after the re-game display result is derived. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the re-game display result is derived without causing a sense of incongruity. Further, delay control is performed after the re-game display result is derived, and the delay control is released when the game medium is inserted and the detection result by the game medium detection unit becomes the release result. Thereby, even if the bet amount is updated by deriving the re-game display result to the player, the next game cannot be started unless the game medium is inserted, and the game medium is inserted. This makes it seem as if the next game can be started.

In the fourth modification, after the re-game display result is derived, the re-game derivation update unit starts updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage unit, and then the game medium detection unit When the game medium is detected, the game value stored in the game value storage means is updated (refer to FIG. 44 in the present example, with respect to the allowable timing of insertion / payment after replay winning) in the modified example. ] Column)))).
Therefore, even after the re-game display result is derived, the inserted game medium is the game medium detected after the update of the bet amount by the re-game derivation update unit is started, so that The game value can be updated according to the game medium. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game value from being updated before the bet amount is set after the re-game display result is derived. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player after the re-game display result is derived without causing a sense of incongruity. Further, delay control is performed after the re-game display result is derived, and the delay control is released when the game medium is inserted and the detection result by the game medium detection unit becomes the release result. Thereby, even if the bet amount is updated by deriving the re-game display result to the player, the next game cannot be started unless the game medium is inserted, and the game medium is inserted. This makes it seem like the next game can be started.

In the above-described modification 4, the replay prize (replay in this example, first and second replays) occurs (in this example, YES in S12 in FIGS. 39 to 41), and the gaming value is reduced. The bet number stored in the bet number storage means is updated so that the next game can be started without using it (S14 and S15 in FIGS. 39 to 41 in this example).
According to this feature, the next game can be started without using a game value by generating a re-game winning.

  [Regarding the invention included in the above embodiment]

[About the invention included in the first embodiment]
As a technique related to the first embodiment, for example, the probability of winning a replay is increased, and the probability of winning a bonus or a small role is controlled to a replay time set to the same probability as a normal time. There is known a slot machine that displays the number of medals (net increase number) acquired by the user (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-6223 (for example, paragraph [0070])). Also, for example, a slot machine that displays the number of medals to be paid out when a small role wins in a replay time that ends when a fixed number of medals are paid out (for example, JP-A-2009-5971) (For example, see paragraph [0225] and paragraph [0331]).

  By the way, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2008-6223 and JP-A-2009-5971, when the medals are paid out, the number of medals to be paid out and the net number of increased medals are notified, so that the medals are paid out. This means that the event has occurred. Then, when the occurrence of one event is accumulated and a predetermined condition is satisfied, and thereby another event different from the one event occurs, the notification for each event is performed separately. Is difficult to recognize each notification at the same time, which may hinder the player's recognition of the notification.

  The invention included in the first embodiment has been made in view of such a problem, and one event has occurred even when another event has occurred due to accumulation of the occurrence of one event. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing this and further impressing that another event has occurred.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine (eg, the slot machine 1 in the first embodiment) capable of performing a game,
A first event (for example, a payout of a medal in the first embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a win of a small role in the first embodiment) and the occurrence of the first event are accumulated. And a second event different from the first event (for example, in the first embodiment, a net increase in the number of medals reaches a prescribed number) can occur.
A first notification effect executing means for executing a first notification effect for notifying that the first event has occurred (for example, in the first embodiment, a portion for performing the process of Sq5 in FIG. 21);

A second notification effect execution unit (for example, a part that performs the process of Sq4 in FIG. 21 in the first embodiment) that executes a second notification effect notifying that the second event has occurred;
When the first event occurs and the second event also occurs, the gaming machine does not execute the first notification effect by the first notification effect execution unit, and executes the second notification effect by the second notification effect execution unit. (For example, in the first embodiment, the portion that performs the processing of Sq4 when Y is Sq3 in FIG. 21)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the second event occurs, the occurrence of the first event also accompanies. Therefore, by notifying that the second event has occurred by executing the second notification effect, the player can determine whether the second event has occurred. The occurrence of the first event can be recognized simultaneously with the occurrence. In addition, by efficiently notifying only that the second event has occurred, it is possible to further impress that the second event has occurred.

[About inventions included in the second and third embodiments]

  As a technique related to the second embodiment and the third embodiment, for example, the probability of winning a replay is increased and the probability of winning a bonus or a small role is controlled to a replay time set to the same probability as a normal time. 2. Description of the Related Art A slot machine that displays the number of medals (net increase) obtained by a player in time is known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-6223 (eg, paragraph [0070])). Also, for example, a slot machine that displays the number of medals to be paid out when a small role wins in a replay time that ends when a fixed number of medals are paid out (for example, JP-A-2009-5971) (For example, see paragraph [0225] and paragraph [0331]).

  By the way, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2008-6223 and JP-A-2009-5971, when the medals are paid out, the number of medals to be paid out and the net number of increased medals are notified, so that the medals are paid out. This means that the event has occurred. Then, in the gaming machine that notifies that one event has occurred, when it is also notified that another event different from the one event has occurred, it is possible that different events occur at the same timing. In this case, if the notification method is not considered, there is a possibility that one notification may disturb another notification.

  The inventions included in the second embodiment and the third embodiment are made by focusing on such a problem, and even when notifying that different events have occurred, one notification is replaced by another notification. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying at the same timing without disturbing the game.

In order to solve the above-described problems, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment includes:
A gaming machine (eg, a slot machine 1 in the second embodiment) capable of playing a game,
A first event (for example, a payout of medals in the second embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the second embodiment, winning of a small role) and an occurrence of the first event. And a second event different from the first event (for example, in the second embodiment, the net increase in the number of medals reaches a specified number) can occur.
A first notification effect execution unit (for example, in the second embodiment, capable of executing a first notification effect (for example, a medal acquisition sound in the second embodiment) for notifying that the first event or the second event has occurred. Speakers 53, 54),
A second notification effect execution unit (for example, a second notification effect that can execute a second notification effect (for example, in the second embodiment, an acquired number display and a specified number reaching display) that notifies that the first event or the second event has occurred. In the second embodiment, a liquid crystal display 51) is provided.
When the first event has occurred and the second event has not occurred, the execution of the first notification effect by the first notification effect execution unit and the execution of the second notification effect by the second notification effect execution unit cause the first event to be executed. The occurrence is notified (for example, in the second embodiment, the process of Ss5 is performed when Ss1 is Y and Ss3 is N in FIG. 23),
When the first event and the second event occur, one of the occurrences is notified by the execution of the first notification effect by the first notification effect execution unit, and the other is notified by the second notification effect execution unit. Notify by execution of the effect (for example, in the second embodiment, the part of performing Ss4 processing when Y is Ss1 and Y is Ss3 in FIG. 23).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even in the case of notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without obstructing another notification.

In order to solve the above-described problems, a gaming machine according to a third embodiment includes:
A gaming machine (eg, a slot machine 1 in the third embodiment) capable of playing a game,
A first event (for example, payout of medals in the third embodiment) that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the third embodiment, a small prize is won), regardless of whether the first event occurs. And a second event different from the first event (for example, in the third embodiment, an additional number of AT games) can occur.
First notification effect execution means (for example, in the third embodiment, which can execute a first notification effect (e.g., a medal acquisition sound and an additional sound of the number of AT games in the third embodiment) for notifying that the first event or the second event has occurred. In the third embodiment, speakers 53 and 54)
A second notification effect execution unit (for example, in the third embodiment, capable of executing a second notification effect (e.g., display of the acquired number and an additional number of AT games in the third embodiment) for notifying that the first event or the second event has occurred. In the third embodiment, a liquid crystal display 51) is provided,
When the first event has occurred and the second event has not occurred, the execution of the first notification effect by the first notification effect execution unit and the execution of the second notification effect by the second notification effect execution unit cause the first event to be executed. The occurrence is notified (for example, in the third embodiment, the portion that executes the process of St5 when Y is St2 and N is St3 in FIG. 26),
When the second event occurs and the first event does not occur, the execution of the first notification effect by the first notification effect execution unit and the execution of the second notification effect by the second notification effect execution unit cause the generation of the second event. The occurrence is notified (for example, in the third embodiment, the portion that executes the process of St5 when N is St2 and St6 is Y in FIG. 26),
When the first event and the second event occur, one of the occurrences is notified by the execution of the first notification effect by the first notification effect execution unit, and the other is notified by the second notification effect execution unit. Notify by executing the effect (for example, in the third embodiment, when St2 is Y and St3 is Y in FIG. 26, the portion that executes the process of St4)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even in the case of notifying that different events have occurred, one notification can be notified at the same timing without obstructing another notification.

  [Modification of First Embodiment]

[About 1st event and 2nd event]
In the first embodiment, the first event is the payout of medals in the AT and the second event is that the net increase in the AT reaches a specified number. And the second event is added and the number of games reaches the specified number of games, or the first event is the digestion of the game and the second event is the number of digested games reaches the specified number of games, or The mode of the first event and the second event may be different from that of the above-described embodiment. For example, the first event may be an error occurrence, and the second event may be that the number of error occurrences reaches a specified number.

[Notification]
In the first embodiment, an example in which the first event and the second event are notified by the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the speakers 53 and 54 and the effect LED 52 may be used. A back lamp (for example, a reel LED 55) disposed on the back side (inside) of the reel, a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured to allow the reel to be viewed) disposed on the front side of the reel, and a front door 1b by means different from the first embodiment, such as a lamp or an LED (for example, effect LED 52) attached to 1b or the like, vibration of a stop switch, air blowing from around the stop switch, change in temperature of the stop switch, etc. The notification of the second event may be performed. The notification of the first event and the second event may be performed by using a part of a device having another function (for example, when an effect is performed using the reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 May be provided with a device that performs only notification.

  [Modification of Second Embodiment]

[About 1st event and 2nd event]
In the above-described second embodiment, the first event is the payout of medals in the AT, and the second event is that the net increase in the AT reaches a specified number. And the second event is added and the number of games reaches the specified number of games, or the first event is the digestion of the game and the second event is the number of digested games reaches the specified number of games, or , The first event is defined as the occurrence of an error, and the second event is defined as the number of occurrences of the error reaching a specified number. May be different from the above-described embodiment as long as the above occurs.

[Notification]
In the second embodiment, the example in which the first event and the second event are notified by the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect LED 52 and the rear side of the reel are provided. A back lamp (e.g., a reel LED 55) disposed on the (inside), a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured to allow the reel to be viewed) disposed on the front side of the reel, and a front door 1b, etc. The first event and the second event by means different from the second embodiment, such as a lamp or an LED (for example, a staging effect LED 52), vibration of a stop switch, air blowing around the stop switch, and a change in temperature of the stop switch. Notification may be performed. The notification of the first event and the second event may be performed by using a part of a device having another function (for example, when an effect is performed using the reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 May be provided with a device that performs only notification. For example, the notification of the first event and the notification of the second event may be performed by different types of devices, or may be performed by a plurality of the same type of devices.

  [Modification of Third Embodiment]

[About 1st event and 2nd event]
In the third embodiment, the first event is the payout of medals in the AT, and the second event is the addition of the number of games added to the AT. For example, the first event is the addition of the number of games added to the AT, Two events are when the net increase in the number of medals reaches a specified number, or the first event is a game digestion, and the second event is the addition of the number of games added to the AT, or the first event is an error. The mode of the first event and the second event may be different from that of the above-described embodiment as long as the first event and the second event are not related to each other.

[Notification]
In the third embodiment, the example in which the first event and the second event are notified by the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the effect LED 52 and the rear side of the reel may be used. A back lamp (e.g., a reel LED 55) disposed on the (inside), a transmissive liquid crystal display (a liquid crystal display configured to allow the reel to be viewed) disposed on the front side of the reel, and a front door 1b, etc. The first event and the second event are performed by means different from the third embodiment, such as a lamp or an LED (for example, effect LED 52), vibration of a stop switch, air blowing around the stop switch, and a change in the temperature of the stop switch. Notification may be performed. The notification of the first event and the second event may be performed by using a part of a device having another function (for example, when an effect is performed using the reel LED 55, the reel LED 55 May be provided with a device that performs only notification. For example, the notification of the first event and the notification of the second event may be performed by different types of devices, or may be performed by a plurality of the same type of devices.

[About gaming machines]
In the above embodiment, the slot machine for setting the number of bets using medals and credits has been described as an example.However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, using a gaming ball used in a pachinko gaming machine The invention according to claim 1 is realized by applying the configuration shown in the above-described embodiment to a slot machine for setting a bet amount or a completely credit type slot machine for setting a bet amount using only credits. It is possible. When a game ball is used as a game medium, for example, when one medal corresponds to five game balls, and when the number of bets is set to 3 in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. Is used to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to a medal insertion mechanism such as a flow path switching solenoid 30 and an inserted medal sensor 31, a ball capturing device for capturing game balls, a captured ball for detecting a game ball captured by the ball capturing device. A detection switch is provided, and in addition to a medal payout mechanism such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device that pays out game balls, and a payout ball detection switch that detects game balls paid out by the ball payout device. Is provided, and the game can be performed by setting the number of bets using both the medals and the game balls, and the slot machine in which the medals and the game balls are paid out by the occurrence of the prize is described in the above embodiment. The present invention can be realized by applying the configuration.

  The present invention also relates to a home game machine or other computer device for starting game software (slot machine game, pachinko game machine game), and a portable terminal for starting an installed mobile application (slot machine application, pachinko game machine application). It is also possible to configure as a gaming machine.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main control unit 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
91 Sub-control unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
A first event that occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a second event that occurs regardless of the occurrence of the first event and is different from the first event can occur;
A first notification that can specify that the first event has occurred when the first event has occurred can be executed by the first notification unit, and specifies that the second event has occurred when the second event has occurred. First notification execution means capable of executing possible second notification by the first notification means;
A third notification that can specify that the first event has occurred when the first event has occurred can be executed by the second notification means, and specifies that the second event has occurred when the second event has occurred. A second notification execution unit capable of executing a possible fourth notification by the second notification unit,
When the first event occurs and the second event does not occur, the first notification unit executes the first notification, and the second notification unit executes the third notification.
When the second event has occurred and the first event has not occurred, the second notification is executed by the first notification unit, and the fourth notification is executed by the second notification unit.
When the first event and the second event occur, the first notification unit does not execute the second notification and executes the first notification, but the second notification unit does not execute the third notification and performs the fourth notification. Run
The first event is that a first privilege has been granted, the second event is that a second privilege different from the first privilege has been granted,
A gaming machine, wherein the second notification means is a display device. Gaming value storage means for storing gaming values that can be used for setting the number of bets;
Bet number storage means for storing a bet amount set for one game;
When the re-game display result is derived, a re-game derivation time setting means for setting the number of bets so that the next game can be started without consuming the game value owned by the player,
Path switching means for switching the flow-down path of the game medium inserted by the player to a discharge-side path discharged to the outside or an intake-side path to take in the inside,
Switching control means for controlling the path switching means,
The gaming machine is
When a game medium is inserted by a player while a game is being played, updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means also changes the game value stored in the game value storage means. Without updating
When a game medium is inserted by the player after the game is completed without deriving the re-game display result, when the bet number stored in the bet number storage means is less than a predetermined upper limit number Updating the bet number stored in the bet number storage means, and updating the game value stored in the game value storage means when the upper limit has been reached,
When a game medium is inserted by the player after the re-game display result is derived and the game is completed and before the next game can be started by setting a bet amount by the re-game derivation time setting means, The betting number is set by the re-game derivation setting unit without updating the betting number stored in the betting number storage unit or the game value stored in the gaming value storage unit. If a game medium is inserted by the player after the next game can be started, it is possible to update the game value stored in the game value storage means,
The switching control means,
After the re-game display result is derived and the game is over, and after the betting number is set by the re-game derivation setting means, the game value stored in the game value storage means reaches the upper limit number. First disabling setting processing for determining whether or not the game media can be inserted when the game value stored in the game value storage means has reached the upper limit number. Do
After the bet amount is set, when the insertion of the game medium is detected in a state where the game medium can be inserted, it is determined whether or not the game value stored in the game value storage means reaches the upper limit number. If the determination is made, and the game value stored in the game value storage means reaches the upper limit, a second disable setting process of setting that the insertion of the game medium is impossible is performed,
The common switching process is performed both when the first disabling setting process is performed and when the second disabling setting process is performed, so that the setting that the insertion of the game medium is disabled is performed. If the gaming machine according to claim 1, it flows down the path of the inserted game media to and performs control of the path switching means so that the discharge-side path by the player.

Images